DOE-HDBK-6004-99, Supplementary Guidance and Design Experience for the Fusion Safety Standards DOE-STD-6002-96 and DOE-STD-6003-96
Functional areas: Fusion Facilities, Administrative Procedures
Two standards have been developed that pertain to the safety fusion facilities. These are DOE-STD-6002-96, Safety of Magnetic Fusion Facilities: Requirements, and DOE-STD-6003-96, Safety of Magnetic Fusion Facilities: Guidance. The first of these standards identifies requirements that subscribers to that standard must meet to achieve safety in fusion facilities. The second standard contains guidance to assist in meeting the requirements identified in the first. This handbook provides additional documentation on good operators of previous fusion facilities and related systems. It is intended to capture the experience gained in the various fields and pass it on to designers or future fusion facilities as a means of enhancing success and safety.
Document text
Text extracted from the attached file. Refer to the original document for the authoritative version.
Section 1
TS
NOT MEASUREMENT
SENSITIVE
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
January 1999
DOE HANDBOOK
SUPPLEMENTARY GUIDANCE AND DESIGN
EXPERIENCE FOR THE FUSION SAFETY
STANDARDS DOE-STD-6002-96 AND
DOE-STD-6003-96
U.S. Department of Energy AREA SAFT
Washington, D.C. 20585
DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A. Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.
This document has been reproduced from the best available copy.
Available to DOE and DOE contractors from ES&H Technical Information
Services, U.S. Department of Energy, (800) 473-4375, fax: (301) 903-9823.
Available to the public from the U.S. Department of Commerce, Technology
Administration, National Technical Information Service, Springfield, VA 22161;
(703) 605-6000.
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
FOREWORD
Two standards have been developed that pertain to the safety of fusion facilities. These are DOE
STD-6002-96, Safety of Magnetic Fusion Facilities: Requirements, and DOE-STD-6003-96, Safety
of Magnetic Fusion Facilities: Guidance. The first of these standards identifies requirements that
subscribers to that standard must meet to achieve safety in fusion facilities. The second standard
contains guidance to assist in meeting the requirements identified in the first. This handbook provides
additional documentation on good operations and design practices as well as lessons learned from the
experiences of designers and operators of previous fusion facilities and related systems. It is intended
to capture the experience gained in the various fields and pass it on to designers of future fusion
facilities as a means of enhancing success and safety.
The sections of this document are presented according to the physical location of the major systems
of a fusion facility, beginning with the vacuum vessel and proceeding to those systems and
components outside the vacuum vessel (the “Ex-vessel Systems”). The last section describes
administrative procedures that cannot be localized to specific components. It has been tacitly
assumed that the general structure of the fusion facilities addressed is that of a tokamak, though the
same principles would apply to other magnetic confinement options.
In what follows, use of the term “shall” has been avoided because this document is intended as advice
and guidance only. It is not to be construed as regulatory in any way. In a similar vein, references
to: safety-class or safety-significant structures, subsystems, and components should be viewed with
the understanding that use of these designations, though not mandatory in the Requirements standard
(DOE-STD-6002-96), are recommended in the Guidance standard (DOE-STD-6003-96). Again, the
content of this document represents accumulated conventional wisdom of those who have experience
building such systems and facilities.
The material here is collected from a wide variety of sources. With the intent of capturing the
information rather than making the product a polished document, there will be some variations in style
and approach evident in the various sections. The authors felt allowing these variations would be a
good stewardship of resources in the times of fiscal restraint and uncertainty in which this document
was prepared.
iii
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
iv
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
CONTENTS
FOREWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
ACRONYMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Section 2
SECTION I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
VACUUM VESSEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
GENERAL SAFETY DESIGN CRITERION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
POTENTIAL SYSTEM SAFETY FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Structural Design Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Hydrogen Detonation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
SAFETY-RELATED DESIGN STANDARDS AND CRITERIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Structural . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Individual Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Static Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Normal Operating Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Normal Operating Thermal Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Electromagnetic Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Interaction Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Natural Phenomena Hazard Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Loss-of-coolant Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Hydrogen Detonation Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Site-generated Missile Impact Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Combined Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Cyclic Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Structural Acceptance Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Vacuum vessel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Piping, Pumps and Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Section 3
Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Deflection Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Weld Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Pressure Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Computer Code Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Instrumentation and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Vacuum Vessel Penetrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Ventilation and Exhaust System Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Confinement Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Containment Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
RECOMMENDED DESIGN PRACTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Bellows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Ceramic Breaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
SECTION I REFERENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
SECTION II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
v
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
EX-VESSEL SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
MAGNET SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Recommended Design Practice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
CRYOSTAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Section 4
General Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
CONFINEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Ventilation/HVAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Ventilation systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Structural Design Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
General Safety Design Guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Potential System Safety Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Safety-Class Design Standards and Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Structural . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
HVAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Potential Safety Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Safety-Related Design Guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
System Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Structural Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
General Safety Design Guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
I&C System Analysis and Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Safety System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Instrumentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Potential System Safety Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Safety Related Design Standards and Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Section 5
Graded Approach to Defense In Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Response Time Requirements and Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Human Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Testability and Maintainability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Control Room Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Safety Actuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
TRITIUM SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
General Safety Design Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Generic System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Tritium Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Tritium Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Tritium Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Tritium Purification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
System Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Potential System Safety Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
vi
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Normal Operation: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Maintenance: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Design Basis Accidents: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Internal Initiators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
External Initiators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Beyond Design Basis Accidents: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Safety-Class Design Standards and Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Section 6
Structural . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Structural Acceptance Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Deflection Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Testing and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Computational Methods Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Radiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Thermal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Tritium Embrittlement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Penetrations of Confinement Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Instrumentation and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Confinement Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Primary Confinement Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Secondary and Higher Order Confinement Barriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Segmented Tritium Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Protection For Natural Phenomena . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Protection from Environmental Conditions and Missiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Fire Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Conversion of Elemental Tritium to Tritium Oxide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Heat Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
System Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Tests and Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Section 7
Radiation Shielding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Confinement Barriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Structural Design Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Hydrogen Fire and Detonation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Hydrogen Fires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Hydrogen Detonations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Metal Embrittlement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Exchange with Hydrogen, Hydrogenated Compounds, and Hazardous Wastes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Components of Primary Confinement System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Recommended Design Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Materials of Construction for Primary Confinement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Recommended Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Materials Not Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Pressure Relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
vii
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Heating and Ventilation - Personnel Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Primary System Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Past Design Practice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Tritium Confinement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Metal Hydride Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Tritium Storage Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Purification Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Tritium Purification, Stripping and Recovery Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Purification Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Section 8
Stripping and Recovery Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Tritium Control, Accountability and Physical Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Legal Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Nuclear Safety Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
DOE Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Good Practices - Nuclear Material Locations at a Fusion Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Tritium Measurement Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Composition Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Thermal Methods of Inventory Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Tritium Concentration Measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Facility Measurement Recommendations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Measurement of tritium input / output to facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
In Process tritium measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Tritium in Waste Streams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Stack emission measurements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
COOLING SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
General Safety Design Criterion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Potential System Safety Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Normal Operation, Shutdowns and Anticipated Off-normal Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Design Basis Accidents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Internal Initiators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
External Initiators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Potential Safety Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Beyond Design Basis Accidents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Section 9
Safety Design Standards and Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Structural . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Structural Acceptance Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Deflection Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Testing and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Computational Methods Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Instruments and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Passive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Recommended Design Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Generic System Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
viii
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Past Design Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
General Safety Design Guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Potential System Safety Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Safety-Class Design Criteria and Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
General Design Safety Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
General Design Criteria/Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Radiation/Contamination and Equipment Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Control and Instrumentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Safety-class Diesel Generators and/or Combustion Turbine Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Section 10
Switchgear and Load Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Motor Control Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
AC Motor Control Centers: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
DC Motor Control Centers: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Direct Current Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Vital Instrumentation and Control Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Power, Control, and Instrumentation Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Raceways and Trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Electrical Penetrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Separation of Facility Safety Systems/Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Redundant Channel Separation: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Non-redundant Separation: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Cable Tray Separation: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Cable Color Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Reliability Design Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Independent Design Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Electrical Power Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Combustion turbine-generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
System and Equipment Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Cathodic Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Lightning Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Fire Detection and Fire Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
REMOTE MAINTENANCE SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
System Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Section 11
General Safety Design Guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Potential System Safety Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Normal Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Design Basis Accidents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Beyond Design Basis Accidents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Structural . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Normal Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Natural Phenomena and Accident Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Instrumentation and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
ix
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Function Protection for Natural Phenomena . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Tests and Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Mechanical Test Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Special Test Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Radiation Shielding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Structural Design Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Hydrogen Fires and Detonation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Expected Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
General Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
High Power Equipment in Confined Spaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Plasma Energy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Section 12
Cryogenic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Radiological Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Radiological Contamination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Magnetic Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Radio Frequency Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Hydrogen Isotopes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Materials Of Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Material Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Material Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Wiring Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Maintenance of Remote Handling Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Contamination Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Assembly and Disassembly Techniques. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Special Handling Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Past Design Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Activation Control Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Contamination Control Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Electronics Protection Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Internal Wiring Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Operational Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Mode of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Collision Avoidance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Multiple Remote Device Coordination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Swing Free Crane Technology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Retrieval Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Redundancy of Critical Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Section 13
Remote Release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Safe Return of Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Recommended Design Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Potential Safety Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Safety Related-Design Guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Structural Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Tests and Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Assembly and Disassembly Techniques. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
x
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Special Handling Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Design Guidance for Typical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Electro Mechanical Manipulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Cranes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Remote Manipulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Hoists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Remote Connector Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Specialized Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Robots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
SECTION II REFERENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
SECTION III . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
ADMINISTRATIVE AND OPERATIONAL TECHNIQUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
CONCEPT OF OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Supplemental Guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Section 14
Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Operations Organization and Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Shift Routines and Operating Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Control Area Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Control of On-Shift Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Investigation of Abnormal Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Control of Equipment and System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Lockouts and Tagouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Independent Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Logkeeping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Operations Turnover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Operations Aspects of Facility Chemistry and Unique Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Required Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Timely Orders to Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Operations Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Operator Aid Postings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Equipment and Pipe Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
EMERGENCY PREPAREDNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Supplemental Guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Concept of Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Operational Emergency Event Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Section 15
Site Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
General Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Emergency Plans and Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Hazards Assessment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Emergency Response Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Offsite Response Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Consequence Assessment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
xi
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Protective Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Medical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Recovery and Reentry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Public Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Emergency Facilities and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Drills and Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Drills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
TRAINING AND QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Supplemental Guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Administrative Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
General Facility Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Training Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Contracted Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Facility Training Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Personnel Selection and Staffing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Personnel Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Section 16
Personnel Staffing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Training Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Training Matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Qualification and Certification Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Management Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Training Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Training Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Training Required for Facility Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Initial Training Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Continuing Training Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Maintenance of Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Qualification Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Qualified Operators and Supervisors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Education and Experience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Specific Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Medical Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Written Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Operational Evaluations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Maintenance of Proficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Requalification Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Other Qualified Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Certification Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Certified Operators and Supervisors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Education and Experience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Specific Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Medical Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Written Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Section 17
Oral Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Operational Evaluations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Independent Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Maintenance of Proficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Recertification and Certification Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
xii
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Other Certified Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Written Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Oral Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Operational Evaluations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
APPENDIX A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
CONDUCT OF OPERATIONS SUPPLEMENTAL GUIDANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
APPENDIX B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
EMERGENCY PREPAREDNESS SUPPLEMENTAL GUIDANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
APPENDIX C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
EMERGENCY PREPAREDNESS DEFINITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
APPENDIX D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
TRAINING AND QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
TERMS AND DEFINITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
GUIDANCE DOCUMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
EDUCATION AND EXPERIENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Minimums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Alternatives Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Education Alternatives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
High School Alternatives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
College Alternatives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Section 18
Experience Alternatives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Substitution of Course Work and Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Training And Qualification Requirements - Basis and Rationale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
xiii
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
xiv
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
ACRONYMS
ACI American Concrete Institute
AFOSH Air Force Occupational Safety and Health
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
ANSI American National Standards Institute
API American Petroleum Institute
ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
AWWA American Water Works Association
BIL Basic Impulse Level
BSR Bureau of Standards Review
CFR Code of Federal Regulations
CMMA Crane Manufacturers Association of America
EIA Electronic Industries Association
EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association
ESF Engineered Safety Features
H&V heating and ventilating
HEI Heat Exchanger Institute
HIS Hydraulic Institute Standards
HMI Hoist Manufacturers Institute
HVAC heating, ventilating, and air conditioning
I&C instrumentation and controls
IEC Institute of Electrical Contractors
xv
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association
ISA Instrument Society of America
ITER International Thermonuclear Experimental Reactor
JIC Joint Industrial Council
MCC motor control center
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
NIOSH National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health
NPH Natural Phenomena Hazards, (DOE 5480.11)
NUREG Nuclear Regulatory Commission document
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
PIE postulated initiating events
PPE personal protective equipment
PVTC pressure-volume-temperature-composition
RG Regulatory Guide
RIA Robotics Industrial Association
SAR Safety Analysis Report, (DOE 5480.28)
SSC Structures, subsystems, and components
TEMA Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association
UHMWPE Ultra high molecular weight polyethylene
xvi
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
SECTION I
VACUUM VESSEL
Many of the components within and part of the vacuum vessel vacuum are unique to fusion systems.
Thus, there is little precedence in the established codes and standards and little experience in the
design of those components. Much of the design experience is taken from the design of plasma
experiments where the power levels and radiation fluxes are much lower.
The vacuum vessel is assumed to be a torus-shaped container usually made of a metal or metallic
alloy, and its volume can be several times the plasma volume. It can be thin-walled or thick-walled.
It may be double-walled with coolant passages between the walls. The perimeter of the vacuum
vessel is outfitted with a number of ports for mounting hardware for plasma fueling and heating,
plasma conditioning and for vacuum pumping. These ports can vary in size and shape and are usually
located above, below, and on the horizontal plane as well as on top and bottom of the vacuum vessel.
It may be of all-welded, continuous construction or use bolts between toroidal segments with vacuum
seal welds at the joint.
Section 19
GENERAL SAFETY DESIGN CRITERION
If required by the facility safety analysis, the vacuum vessel will be a confinement or containment
barrier for tritium and tritiated compounds, radioactive impurities and activated dust. The
requirement for robustness of the barrier will be defined in the safety analysis and implemented in the
design. In performing this function, the vacuum vessel will be classified as a safety-class system. If
the vacuum vessel is not considered a confinement or containment barrier in the safety analysis, those
vacuum vessel components whose single failure results in loss of capability of another safety-class
system to perform its safety function should be designated as safety-class components. The vacuum
vessel may also be a physical barrier between different fluid streams (such as liquid metal and water)
whose interconnection could potentially produce large energy release events which could compromise
nearby safety-class systems.
POTENTIAL SYSTEM SAFETY FUNCTIONS
If the safety analysis requires that the vacuum vessel be a confinement or containment barrier, the
following safety functions are specified:
1. Normal operation including anticipated operational likely and unlikely events - to act as the first
barrier for tritium and tritiated compounds, radioactive impurities and activated dust.
2. Maintenance
a) To act as the first barrier for tritium and tritiated compounds, radioactive impurities and
activated dust during maintenance external to vacuum vessel.
b) To act as a partial confinement barrier as defined in the safety analysis for tritium and
tritiated compounds, radioactive impurities and activated dust during maintenance inside the
vacuum vessel.
1
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
3. Design Basis Accidents - To act as the first barrier for tritium and tritiated compounds,
radioactive impurities, activated dust, or any other coolant or material located in the vacuum
vessel during design basis accidents.
Design basis accidents will be specified in the safety analysis and mitigated in the system design
requirements. A accident probability, P, for defining a design basis accident is typically
10-4/year>P>10-6/year; the actual probability will be specified in the facility safety analysis. The
following are potential design basis accidents for fusion DT facilities: burn excursion, loss of vacuum
pumping, loss of vacuum, loss of flow or coolant pressure to actively-cooled components inside the
vacuum vessel, chemical reactions including hydrogen detonation, site-generated missile impact, and
design basis natural phenomenon: earthquake, flooding, and severe winds. However, any of these
may be categorized as likely or unlikely events depending on the probability as assessed in the safety
analysis.
4. Beyond Design Basis Accidents - There are no system safety functions required for beyond design
basis accidents.
DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
General
The primary confinement or containment should normally be provided by the pressure boundary of
the fusion machine, its associated vacuum system, and the various tritium systems (DOE 6430.1A
(c)). If this barrier is deemed a safety-class system, then other hardware with pressure containing
surfaces on the vacuum boundary are safety-class components and must be designed to function as
confinement or containment as appropriate in the same operational and accident modes for which the
vacuum vessel is designed.
Structural Design Codes
Section 20
DOE Order 6430.1A, General Design Criteria, required that safety-class components be designed,
fabricated, inspected, and tested in accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,
Section III, Class 3 or to a comparable safety-related code. The following discussion modifies this
requirement for fusion safety-class items to provide more flexibility in design and manufacturing
without compromising the safety function of the item. The complex nature of many fusion
components may require specific analysis under the alternate design rules of Section III, Class 1 or
2 or the comparable elements of Section VIII, Division 2 for pressure vessels. In defining a
comparable code to ASME Section III, the use of ASME Section VIII is acceptable if additional
standards are provided in areas such as attached valves, pumps, piping and supports, enhanced quality
assurance and radiation effects which are comparable to relevant parts of Section III. In general, a
detailed comparison should be made between ASME, Section III and the comparable code to be used
to design safety-class items to demonstrate actual comparability. This code comparison should be
performed early in the design phase and should be endorsed by the licensing or regulatory authority
to ensure the design product will be acceptable for construction. Finally, the actual stamping of a
vessel designed, fabricated, inspected, and tested to Section III or VIII is not addressed by this
document nor in the Fusion Safety Standards and is considered to be a decision between the owner,
fabricator, and the cognizant regulatory agency.
2
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Hydrogen Detonation
A hydrogen detonation is a potential hazard which may occur as part of a design basis accident
(typical probability > 10-6 per year). If it does occur and the vacuum vessel is a confinement or
containment barrier, then the required integrity of the barrier must be maintained during and after this
event, although the non-safety-related functions of the vacuum vessel (such as ability to maintain high
vacuum) can be compromised. If the vacuum vessel is not a confinement or containment barrier and
a hydrogen detonation is credible, it must be shown that no failure of a vacuum vessel component due
to this event can degrade the function of an adjacent safety-class system or item.
Section 21
To determine if a potential hydrogen detonation can occur in a design basis accident, it is necessary
to evaluate the likelihood of having the three ingredients for detonation at the same time: hydrogen
and oxygen in the appropriate mixtures and an ignition source (NUREG/CR-4961). Generally, direct
initiation of hydrogen-air mixtures is possible with about 1 gram of high explosive (NUREG/CR
4961) (this is equivalent to about 4 kJ of energy). Since the plasma typically contains much higher
levels of stored energy, it should be assumed that a point ignition source is always present during
normal operations and wall conditioning. The factors determining the likelihood of a detonation are
then the availability of hydrogen isotopes and air. Hydrogen isotopes are present in the solid matrix
of the plasma facing components at substantial levels. This is not ordinarily available for combustion
or detonation although a portion (including tritium) may be released if a detonation occurs. If hot
plasma facing components or the vacuum vessel are cooled with water, a leak could result in the
generation of hydrogen from water (steam)-Be (or C or W) reactions (Smolik 92, Smolik 91). The
precise amount of hydrogen generated depends on the first wall material and temperature and the size
and duration of the water leak but typical conditions in a D-T fusion plasma can generate sufficient
quantities of hydrogen for a detonation. Air (oxygen) also has to be present for a detonation. If air
is adjacent to the vacuum vessel, the in-leakage of air is possible due to the same event which
generated the hydrogen. For example, Be-steam reactions from a water leak during wall conditioning
can result in internal pressures of several bar or more (NET 93), which may be beyond the design
value of the vacuum vessel. This air source can be eliminated in the device design by incorporating
an inert gas volume in the region between the vacuum vessel and its ducts, and the next confinement
barrier. To determine the probability of a hydrogen detonation, a conservative analysis of the above
factors must be performed for a particular design. The likelihood of an in-vessel loss-of-coolant
accident cannot be generally excluded given performance of such actively-cooled systems to date and
the anticipated service conditions in a D-T fusion vacuum vessel.
To preclude a hydrogen detonation for consideration as a design basis accident, it will typically be
necessary to demonstrate a low event probability by:
1. Material selection in the plasma facing components or the fluids used for active in-vessel
component cooling, or
2. Use of an inert gas boundary as discussed above.
3
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
SAFETY-RELATED DESIGN STANDARDS AND CRITERIA
If the vacuum vessel system or individual components are designated safety-class the following design
standards should apply to the system or components:
Structural
The vacuum vessel system boundary should be defined as the vacuum vessel proper including
attached windows, flanges, and ports and all penetrations up to and including the first isolation valve
in system piping which penetrates the vacuum vessel.
Loads
Individual Loads
The vacuum vessel should be designed to withstand the static load, normal operating pressure, normal
operating thermal load, electromagnetic loads (normal operating and fault), disruption/vertical
displacement (VDE) loads, interaction loads from adjacent systems, and transient loads due to design
basis accidents such as natural phenomena, loss-of-coolant into the vessel and subsequent chemical
reactions, site-generated missile impacts, and hydrogen detonation. (These design basis accidents are
for example only, since some of them may not be credible for a particular facility.)
Section 22
Static Load
The static load should include the weight of the vacuum vessel and all supported hardware.
Normal Operating Pressure
The normal operating pressure of the vacuum vessel may be one of the following:
1. 1 atmosphere internal pressure,
2. 1 atmosphere external pressure,
3. No net pressure.
If the vacuum vessel is double-walled with a coolant in the annulus, the maximum coolant pressure
should be the normal operating pressure in the annulus.
Normal Operating Thermal Load
The normal operating thermal load should include transient thermal loads during pulsed operation as
well as the temperature distribution during bakeout and wall conditioning.
4
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Electromagnetic Loads
Electromagnetic loads induced during normal pulsed operation of the device are experienced as a
result of eddy currents in the vessel interacting with the magnetic fields crossing them. Loads should
include the electromagnetic effects of discharge cleaning.
1. Electromagnetic Loads During Faults - Electromagnetic loads induced during abnormal operating
events such as control failures, power supply failures, bus opens or shorts, or magnet faults
should be included in the design.
2. Disruption/VDE Loads - Disruption/VDE loads are any thermal or electromagnetic loads induced
in the vessel due to loss of control of the plasma. A range of plasma motions and current
behaviors should be considered to determine the worst case events. Analysis should include
conservative assumptions for event amplitude, time scale, and event frequency.
Interaction Loads
Interaction loads are loads imposed on the vacuum vessel by other components during normal or fault
conditions.
Natural Phenomena Hazard Loads
Natural phenomena hazard loads are site-specific loads due to earthquakes, wind, and floods.
Guidelines for methods of establishing load levels on facilities from natural phenomena hazards and
for methods of evaluating the behavior of structures and equipment to these load levels are contained
in DOE 1020.
Loss-of-coolant Loads
The confinement or containment should be designed to remain functional after a potential loss-of
coolant to the interior of the vessel including subsequent chemical reactions if this is evaluated as a
design basis accident.
Hydrogen Detonation Loads
The confinement or containment should be designed to remain functional after a potential hydrogen
detonation if this is evaluated as a design basis accident. For guidance on determining if this is a
design basis accident, see Section IV “Design Considerations” within this Vacuum Vessel section.
Site-generated Missile Impact Load
The confinement or containment should be designed to remain functional after a potential missile
impact if this is evaluated as a design basis accident.
5
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Combined Loads
Considerations for combined loads are indicated in Table I-1.
Table I-1 Combined Loads
Hydraulic Thermal Electro
magnetic
Plant Condition Static Norm. Trans. Norm. Trans. Norm. Fault Nat.
Phen.
Miss.
Imp.
Cyc
Normal Operation X X X X X
Maintenance X X1 X1
Design Basis
Accidents
Internal Initiators
1. Coolant Leak in
Vacuum Vessel.
X X X X
2. In-cryostat Leak X X X X
3. Out-of-cryostat
Leak
X X X X
4. Loss of Pumping X X X X
5. Loss of Flow X X X X
6. Loss of Heat Sink X X X
7. Missile or Pipe
Whip
X X X X X X X X
8. Increase in Fusion
Power
X X X
9. Human Error or
Control Fault
X X X X X X
External Initiators
1. Natural
Phenomena
Section 23
X X X X X X X X X
2. Fires X X X X X X X
3. Aircraft or Missile
Impact
X X X X X X X X
Beyond Design Basis
Accidents2
1. Pressure and thermal loads are applicable for portions of system which remain pressurized during maintenance.
2. There are no load combinations for beyond-design-basis accidents.
6
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Cyclic Loading
The vacuum vessel and its supports are subject to cyclic loading during normal operations. Thermal
cycling and unavoidable plasma disruption loads are expected. The necessity of a fatigue analysis
should be evaluated based on the criteria of ASME 93 or comparable safety-related code using
conservative values for variables such as number of pulses, percentage of pulses that have disruptions,
and service life including expected changes in material properties with time. Cyclic loading must be
defined on load/time diagrams so that a fatigue analysis, if necessary, can be performed.
Structural Acceptance Criteria
Vacuum vessel
The vacuum vessel and its appendages should be designed, fabricated, inspected, and tested in
accordance with a recognized safety-related code such as the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code. The design of the fusion facility components which is outside the scope of conventional codes
or standards due to design temperature, materials selection and/or any other design feature, should
meet the safety design criteria of this Fusion Safety Standard and should employ a design and analysis
methodology which is consistent with requirements of a recognized safety-related code.
Piping, Pumps and Valves
Piping, pumps and valves should be designed in accordance with relevant criteria in ASME 93 or a
comparable safety-related code.
Other
Hardware internal or adjacent to the vacuum vessel whose credible failure could impact the safety
function of the vacuum vessel should be classified as safety-class components or items.
Deflection Analysis
Vacuum vessel deflections should be calculated and analyzed to determine potential interferences and
to verify seal integrity.
Testing
Weld Inspection
Non-destructive examination should be performed in accordance with Section V of the ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code as modified by Section III, Article NC-5111 or approved equal. Non
destructive test personnel qualification and weld acceptance criteria are found in Article NC-5000 of
the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code or approved equal.
Pressure Test
1. Vacuum Vessel - All vacuum vessels that provide a containment barrier should be leak checked
before initial operations and periodically thereafter and meet the requirements specified in the
7
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
safety analysis (guidance on leak testing is provided in 10CFR50(J). All vacuum vessels that
provide a confinement barrier should be leak checked before initial operations and periodically
thereafter against the leakage criteria in the facility safety analysis. The vacuum vessel chamber
should be pneumatically tested in accordance with ASME 93 or comparable safety-related code.
A double-walled vacuum vessel should be hydrostatically tested in accordance with ASME 93
or comparable safety-related code.
2. Valves - System isolation valves should be hydrostatically tested in accordance with the ASME
93 or a comparable safety-related code.
Computer Code Verification
Computer codes used for design analysis of the vacuum vessel for normal operating and design basis
accident conditions should have validation and/or verification as described in DOE Standard 6003-96.
This validation and verification should support the use of the code in each intended application.
Section 24
Materials
Material properties used in the structural analysis of safety-class structures, systems, and components
must be appropriate for the operating environment and compensated for the degradation of the
material with time due to radiation, fatigue, corrosion, or any other harsh treatment.
1. Radiation - Materials selected should be qualified for the anticipated lifetime in the radiation
environment. With irradiation, yield strength usually increases as ductility decreases.
Conservative end-of-life properties should be used in the structural design analysis.
2. Thermal - Material properties used in analysis should always be those appropriate at the given
temperature. If no published property data for a particular temperature exists, then materials
should be tested for properties at the operating temperature. For those items to be designed in
accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, temperature limits are imposed
within the Code. If the item will be subjected to temperatures higher or lower than the limit,
material properties, such as allowable stress and creep, used in the analysis should be justified by
testing the material at the anticipated temperature.
3. Swelling - The energetic neutron flux on the first wall, diverter and other plasma facing
components results in displacement cascades and helium-producing nuclear reactions. During
long-term irradiations vacancies coalesce to form helium-filled voids within the material.
Dimensional changes are most severe at about half the melting point of the material. Allowance
must be made for irradiation-induced swelling in the design of any components exposed to the
high-energy neutron flux.
4. Hydrogen Embrittlement - Hydrogen reacts to some degree with almost all metals. When a metal
comes in contact with hydrogen, its surface adsorbs the gas. Surface or physical adsorption is
followed by activated adsorption, a preliminary stage of the diffusion of hydrogen into metals.
With continued exposure, materials can become embrittled. The material properties based on
end-of-life hydrogen embrittlement should be used in the structural design analysis. The actual
8
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
embrittlement of the vacuum vessel in the hydrogen environment should be determined by placing
coupons in the vessel to be periodically removed and inspected for embrittlement. An inspection
schedule should be developed and implemented.
Instrumentation and Controls
Instrumentation and controls, where appropriate, should be provided to monitor system parameters
important to the safety function of the vacuum vessel over their anticipated ranges for normal
operation and design basis accidents to ensure continuity of the required safety function. The design
should incorporate sufficient instrument independence, redundancy and/or diversity to ensure that a
single failure will not result in a loss of monitoring capability for safety-class systems. The different
designs and operating characteristics of fusion facilities limit the amount of specific guidance that can
be provided. However, helpful general guidance for implementing this criteria at a particular fusion
facility may be obtained by reviewing the existing DOE and NRC design requirements and guidance
documents (IEEE 603, DOE 6430.1A (a), NUREG-0800, 10CFR50(A), RG 1.47). The power to
operate safety-class instrumentation should meet the requirements of Class 1E Electric Power
Systems (IEEE 308).
Vacuum Vessel Penetrations
Section 25
For vacuum vessel containment penetrations, each line that is part of the vacuum vessel pressure
boundary and that penetrates the vacuum vessel should be provided with isolation valves, unless it
can be demonstrated that the containment isolation provisions for a specific class of lines, such as
instrument lines, are acceptable on some other defined basis. A simple check valve should not be
used as the automatic isolation valve outside containment. Isolation valves outside containment
should be located as close to containment as practical and upon loss of actuating power, automatic
isolation valves should be designed to take the position that provides greater safety. The power to
operate isolation valves should meet the requirements of Class 1E Electric Power Systems (IEEE
308).
Ventilation and Exhaust System Criteria
Confinement Systems
The design of a vacuum vessel confinement ventilation system should ensure the ability to maintain
desired airflow characteristics when personnel access ports or hatches are open. When necessary,
air locks or enclosed vestibules should be used to minimize the impact of this air flow on the
ventilation system and to prevent the spread of airborne contamination within the facility. The
ventilation system design should provide the required confinement capability under all normal
operations and design basis accidents with the assumption of a single failure in the system. If the
maintenance of a controlled continuous confinement airflow is required, electrical equipment and
components required to provide this airflow should be supplied with safety-class electrical power and
provided with a backup power source. Air cleanup systems should be provided in confinement
ventilation exhaust systems to limit the release of radioactive or other hazardous material to the
environment and to minimize the spread of contamination within the facility as determined by the
safety analysis. Guidance for confinement systems is included in DOE 6430.1A (b).
9
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Containment Systems
For containment systems, RG 1.140 presents guidance for design testing and maintenance for exhaust
systems air filtration that is acceptable to the DOE. As with the confinement systems the basic
criteria are based on the As Low As Reasonably Achievable (ALARA)As Low As Reasonably
Achievable (ALARA) concept given the present state of technology. 10CFR50(I) presents specific
methods and evaluation criteria that are acceptable to DOE in implementing ALARA with respect
to exhaust systems from a containment system.
Inspection
Components should be designed to permit periodic inspection and testing of important areas related
to the intended safety function to assess their structural and leak tight integrity. There should be an
appropriate material surveillance program.
RECOMMENDED DESIGN PRACTICE
Windows
In the analysis of the windows, the condition of the edge restraint is important. It is recommended
that it be assumed that the window is simply supported at the edges, since this is a more conservative
approach (Robinson). However, the weak point in the window may be the edge glass-to-metal braze.
The braze must be analyzed for stress with the fixed-edge assumption. All calculations should be
based on the modulus of rupture which is equal to the ultimate tensile strength/1.75. Factors of safety
lose meaning for glass, because subsurface imperfections can cause failure below the expected tensile
strength. Therefore, a factor of safety of 10 on the modulus of rupture is recommended. Windows
should be designed to minimize the risk of cracking due to a water leak onto the hot disc. This can
be accomplished by providing an inner sacrificial disc with the main sealed disc on the outside. The
connecting inner space is vented to the vacuum by a small hole. This hole would allow vacuum pump
down but would prevent a water leak from reaching the outer window. (Caldwell 89)
Section 26
Bellows
Double bellows with a vacuum-tight inner space are recommended. See the Standards of the
Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, 6th Edition, 1885.
Ceramic Breaks
Ceramic breaks are used to insulate electrical lines that penetrate the vacuum boundary or to insulate
attached piping that is connected to external equipment at a different potential or ground. Where
possible, ceramic breaks should be designed to be shielded from direct line-of-sight with the plasma
or potential spray from rupture of coolant lines.
Ceramic breaks are used on radio frequency (RF) antennas to isolate inner and outer coaxial
conductors at the vacuum boundary. The volume outside of the vacuum boundary contains a
pressurized gas. These RF ceramic breaks are subject to voltage breakdown which could cause local
10
http:strength/1.75
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
melting of the coax and could lead to a breach of confinement or even a water leak. Ceramic breaks
should be located away from where the coax is cooled. A breach in the ceramic break would allow
pressurized gas into the vacuum vessel and tritium into the coax and through the transmission lines
all the way back to the power supply. If the vacuum boundary is defined as a confinement system,
then the use of redundant ceramic breaks is recommended which reduces the possible leak rate to
what is determined acceptable by the facility safety analysis. If a vacuum vessel functions as a
containment, which is a more stringent requirement, then containment of the RF/vacuum vessel
interface could extend along the transmission line back to the power supply.
11
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
12
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
10CFR50 (A)
10CFR50 (I)
10CFR50 (J)
ASME 93
Caldwell 89
DOE-STD-1020-94
DOE 6430.1A (a)
DOE 6430.1A (b)
DOE 6430.1A (c)
IEEE 308
IEEE 603
NET 93
NUREG-0800
NUREG/CR-4961
RG 1.140
RG 1.47
SECTION I REFERENCES
10 CFR Part 50, Appendix A, “General Design Criteria for Nuclear
Power Plants,” specifically: GDC 1, 13, 19, 20, 22, 23, 24, and 64.
10 CFR Part 50, Appendix I.
10 CFR Part 50, Appendix J, “Primary Reactor Containment Leakage
Testing for Water-cooled Reactors.”
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, 1992 Edition with 1993
Addenda.
Design Features of the JET Vacuum Enclosure for Safe Operation
with Tritium, C. J. Caldwell-Nichols, E. Usselmann; IEEE Thirteenth
Symposium on Fusion Engineering, October 1989, Knoxville, TN,
p.716.
DOE-STD-1020-94 DOE Standard, “Natural Phenomena Hazards
Design and Evaluation Criteria for Department of Energy Facilities,”
April, 1994.
Division 13 of DOE Order 6430.1A, “General Design Criteria,” 1989.
DOE 6430.1A, Section 1550.99, “Special Facilities,” 1989.
DOE Order 6430.1A Section 1328-7.1, “Fusion Test Facilities,”
1989.
IEEE Std 308 “Standard Criteria for Class 1E Power Systems for
Nuclear Power Generating Equipment,” 1991.
IEEE-603, “Criteria for Safety Systems for Nuclear Power Generating
Stations,” 1991.
Next European Torus Predesign Report, Fusion Engr. and Design 21,
pp. 335-338 (1993).
Chapter 7.1 of NUREG-0800, “Standard Review Plan for the Review
of Safety Analysis Reports for Nuclear Power Plants,” July 1981.
Summary of Hydrogen-Air Detonation Experiments, NUREG/CR
4961, May 1989.
USNRC Regulatory Guide (Reg. Guide): 1.140.
USNRC Regulatory Guides (Reg. Guides): 1.47, “Bypassed and
Inoperable Status Indication for Nuclear Power Plant Safety
Systems,” May 1973 .
13
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Section 27
RG 1.75 USNRC Regulatory Guides (Reg. Guides): 1.75 Rev. 2, “Physical
Independence of Electric Systems,” September 1978.
RG 1.97 USNRC Regulatory Guides (Reg. Guides): 1.97, Rev. 3
Instrumentation for Light Water-Cooled Nuclear Power Plants to
Assess Plant and Environs Conditions During and Following an
Accident,” May 1983.
Robinson 80 James Robinson, “Design of Viewing Windows for Controlled-
atmosphere Chambers,” ORNL/TM-6864, 1980.
Smolik 91 G. R. Smolik, B. J. Merrill, S. J. Piet and D. F. Holland, “Evaluation
of Graphite/Steam Interactions for ITER Accident Scenarios,” Fusion
Technol. 19, pp. 1342-1348 (1991).
Smolik 92 G. R. Smolik, B. J. Merrill and R. S. Wallace, “Implications of
Beryllium: Steam Interactions in Fusion Reactors,” J. Nuclear
Material 191-194, pp. 153-157 (1992).
14
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
SECTION II
EX-VESSEL SYSTEMS
MAGNET SYSTEMS
Description
The magnet system, for a tokamak device, consists of the toroidal field coils, the poloidal field coils
and the central solenoid. Toroidal field (TF) coils are superconducting cables cooled with liquid
helium which are wound into D shapes. Each coil circumscribes the vacuum vessel cross-section, and
the set of toroidal field coils make a complete circle around the torus. The poloidal field (PF) coils
are also typically superconducting cables cooled with liquid helium and wound into horizontal rings
which are located above and below the vacuum vessel with typically some coil sets inside and outside
the toroidal field coils. The TF and PF coils provide the basic magnetic field geometry for plasma
confinement and position control. The central solenoid conductors are typically superconducting
cables wound horizontally and situated at the center of the vacuum vessel torus supported by, for
example, a bucking cylinder. The central solenoid set provides the transient field to induce all or part
of the plasma current.
Recommended Design Practice
The dielectric strength of the insulation should be provided either by materials with an intrinsic
dielectric strength, or by materials tested before assembly onto the magnet.
The mechanical integrity of the magnets should not depend on the shear strength of the insulating
materials or the shear bond between insulation and structural materials.
Since leaks at coolant connections are a common cause of magnet faults, such connections should
be kept away from mechanical load paths, placed outside the winding pack and, as far as possible,
in regions where some access is, in principle, possible for inspection or repair.
Manufacturing can allow many faults to occur. Machining chips left in the coil slowly abrade
insulation and then cause a failure after some years of machine operation. Very strict tests to
determine the cleanliness of finished units should be performed.
CRYOSTAT
Description
The cryostat is a metal chamber surrounding the fusion device which provides a thermal barrier to
conduction and thermal radiation between the superconducting coils and other cold structures and
the rest of the facility. It may also serve as the biological shield for radiation from the tokamak. The
chamber is usually cylindrical with a top and bottom. There are usually large penetrations in the top,
bottom, and sides of the cryostat, primarily for access to the vacuum vessel and magnets for
maintenance and inspection. The cryostat may be double-walled with an evacuated or filled annulus.
The cryostat itself is usually evacuated and it may be lined with cryogenic panels or insulating material
to reduce radiant heat transfer.
Section 28
15
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
General Recommendations
For large DT fusion facilities the cryostat volume may be of order 10,000-30,000 m3. This volume
is a significant fraction of the internal volume of a fission reactor containment vessel and it may be
appropriate to design the fusion cryostat under the rules for metal containment structures rather than
designing it as a pressure vessel. Double bellows with a vacuum tight interspace are recommended.
CONFINEMENT
General
Confinement/HVAC systems include structures, systems, and components designed to serve as
barriers against the spread or uncontrolled release of radioactive or other hazardous materials
throughout the facility or to the environs.
The facility confinement strategy may consist of successive confinement barriers based on the hazards
present. The successive barriers are generally referred to as primary, secondary, tertiary, etc. and are
defined by the facility safety analysis. Primary confinement is often the function of the vacuum vessel,
cryostat, or system piping, but may be the function of ex-vessel structural barriers and process
enclosures such as gloveboxes, piping, tanks, and ductwork.
Secondary confinement consists of building structural elements and associated ventilation systems that
confine any potential release of hazardous materials from the primary confinement system. This
system includes the operating area boundary and the ventilation system and associated air cleaning
systems serving the operating area. Penetrations of the secondary confinement barrier are generally
provided with positive seals to prevent migration of contamination out of the secondary confinement
area.
Tertiary confinement consists of building elements and associated exhaust system of the process
facility. This is often the final barrier to release of hazardous material to the environment. Tertiary
confinement surrounds the secondary confinement with space which is controlled but not expected
to become contaminated.
Ventilation/HVAC
Ventilation systems should be designed to operate in conjunction with their associated physical
barriers to limit the release of radioactive or other hazardous material to the environment. The
ventilation system capabilities should be sufficient to allow for any intentional breaches of the
confinement system that are required during maintenance on any portion of the facility.
Leak-tightness of the confinement pressure boundary should be considered in the design. Air locks
to achieve the required leak-tightness between confinement/containment zone boundary interfaces
should be considered.
Appropriate filtration may be accomplished by multistage HEPA filtration of the exhaust or by an
equivalent filtering capability. The exhaust ventilation system must be sized to ensure adequate
inflow of air in the event of the largest credible breach of confinement.
16
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Safety-class systems and components should be designed per ASME AG-1 (ASME 93c) or a
comparable code or standard which considers the safety function(s) of the particular system or
component (ASME 89a, ASME 89b). Non-safety-class systems and components should be designed
per codes and standards used for industrial and commercial grade applications.
Design Considerations
Ventilation systems
1. The ventilation systems should be designed so that air flows from the cleaner areas with less
potential for contamination to the potentially more contaminated areas.
Section 29
2. The ventilation system should be designed so that the system parameters which are important to
operational and nuclear safety can be monitored and if necessary tested. This includes but is not
limited to pressure, temperature, air flow, filtering efficiency, environmental releases, etc.
3. The design of the ventilation system should ensure that each of the following design parameters
can be met:
a) Required differential pressures between confinement barriers
b) Required air change rate to maintain concentrations of airborne radioactivity and other
hazardous substances at or below acceptable levels.
c) Required temperature and humidity conditions
4. The ventilation system should be capable of isolating released tritium gas (or other radiologically
hazardous gas) in the event of a breach of the confinement system. In addition the system should
be designed to limit potential releases during normal and accident conditions. The ventilation
system should be designed to control the concentrations of other radiological, toxic and explosive
substances below unacceptable levels.
5. The ventilation system should be capable of monitoring routine as well as accident releases to the
environment through all possible discharge paths.
6. The resultant leak-tightness of the confinement zone pressure boundary should be considered in
the design. Utilization of air locks to achieve the required leak-tightness between
confinement/containment zone boundary interfaces should be considered. The pressure boundary
of any confinement zone should have sufficient leak-tightness so that contamination control is
achieved without excessive in-leakage.
Structural Design Codes
General design criteria for all DOE facilities is given in the DOE Order 1020. Requirements for the
environmental, safety and health protection are given in the DOE Order 5480.4. Requirements for
natural phenomena hazards (NPH) mitigation are given in the DOE Order 5480.28 with the
accompanying DOE Standards 1020 and 1021. Although DOE 5480.28, DOE 1020 and DOE 1021
are for NPH they provide a baseline to be extended to fusion related SSCs.
17
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
General Safety Design Guidance
The confinement system design should establish the features which minimize the spread of both
gaseous and particulate contamination throughout the facility. The confinement systems discussed
here are those that are beyond the boundary of the vacuum vessel and its ancillary systems.
In order to establish the confinement areas for the facility outside the vacuum vessel, a safety analysis
considering normal and accident conditions should be performed. The resultant safety classification
of confinement zones from the safety analysis should be the basis for determining the ventilation
system design requirements as well as the architectural/structural requirements for the respective
confinement areas. (Burchsted 76)
The confinement systems should be divided into the following confinement systems as necessary to
support the safety analysis:
1. The ex-vessel primary confinement system should consist of structural barriers and process
enclosures such as gloveboxes, piping, tanks and any associated ductwork and their associated
ventilation and air cleaning systems that are required to prevent the release of hazardous material
to areas beyond the confinement boundary. In addition, credible breaches in the primary
confinement barrier should be compensated for by provision of adequate inflow of air or safe
collection of hazardous material that escapes the confinement. This is accomplished by multistage
HEPA filtration of the exhaust or by an equivalent filtering capability. The exhaust ventilation
system must be sized to ensure adequate inflow of air in the event of the largest credible breach
of confinement.
Section 30
2. The secondary confinement system should consist of the walls, roofs and associated ventilation
systems that confine any potential release of hazardous materials from the primary confinement
system. This system includes the operating area boundary and the ventilation system and any
associated air cleaning systems serving the operating area. The ventilation system should be
designed to ensure proper airflow direction and velocity to counteract the largest credible breach
in secondary confinement barrier. Penetrations of the secondary confinement barrier should be
provided with positive seals to prevent migration of contamination out of the secondary
confinement area.
3. The tertiary confinement system should consist of the walls, floor, roof and associated exhaust
system of the process facility. It is the final barrier to release of hazardous material to the
environment. This level of confinement should be provided for the space bounding the secondary
confinement which is not expected to become contaminated.
Potential System Safety Functions
The confinement systems along with their associated HVAC systems should be designed to provide
the following functions for the facility:
1. Normal Operation:
a) Prevent and control the spread of gaseous and particulate contamination. This is
accomplished by controlling confinement zone differential pressures as well as
18
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
providing sufficient air exchange rate within the confinement zones. (ASHRAE,
ASHRAE 91, DOE 6430.1A)
b) Monitor the contamination levels in the zones to ensure personnel radiological safety
is maintained. (ASHRAE 91, DOE 5480.11, DOE 6430.1A) In addition, any potential
for airborne toxic and corrosive products in the atmosphere that may compromise
personnel safety or equipment operability should be monitored and controlled.
c) Monitor the radiological releases to the environment to ensure the continued
effectiveness of the confinement system to capture and retain radioactive contaminants
before they are exhausted to the environment. (ASHRAE 91, DOE 5480.11, DOE
6430.1A)
d) Maintain the required temperature and humidity conditions in the zone. (ASHRAE 91)
2. Maintenance:
Provide the necessary ventilation system functional capabilities to allow for any intentional
breaches of the confinement system that are required to perform maintenance on any portion of
the system. (ASHRAE 91)
3. Design Basis Accidents:
a) Prevent and control the spread of gaseous and radioactive contamination during and
following all credible design basis accidents. (ASHRAE, ASHRAE 91, DOE
6430.1A)
b) Monitor the radiological releases to the environment during and following any
credible design basis accident. (ASHRAE 91, DOE 5480.11, DOE 6430.1A)
c) Maintain temperature, pressure and humidity conditions for the equipment required to
operate during and following a DBA. This includes the ability to rapidly remove heat
in worst case loss of coolant accident condition.
Safety-Class Design Standards and Criteria
Section 31
The safety analysis to determine the safety system classification of the confinement systems and their
associated HVAC systems should be based on the requirements given in DOE-STD-1027-92 or
equivalent. Ventilation systems that are classified as “safety class” should be designed to operate in
conjunction with their associated physical barriers to limit the release of radioactive or other
hazardous material to the environment. In addition they should be subject to appropriately higher
quality design, fabrication and test standards and codes to increase the reliability of the system and
allow credit to be taken for their functional capability in a safety analysis. In addition the safety
analysis should determine the appropriate level of redundancy, diversity, independence and the need
for emergency power to ensure safety system function capability during and following all credible
postulated design basis accidents.
19
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Structural
1. Design Approach
The structural design philosophy should be similar to that given for the design and evaluation of DOE
facilities for NPH in DOE Order 6430.1A, (DOE 6430.1A), with its supplemental Standards, (DOE
1020, DOE 1021). The design procedure combines probabilistic and deterministic approaches and
is summarized below:
a) Establish performance category based on the desired target probabilistic performance goal,
expressed as mean annual probability of exceeding the acceptable behavior limits.
b) Develop loads from hazards assessment by specifying mean annual probabilities of
exceeding the acceptable limits.
c) Use deterministic design and evaluation procedures for the resulting load combinations, to
achieve performance goals and to provide a consistent and appropriate level of
conservatism. The design procedures conform closely to industry practices using national
consensus codes and standards. The procedures extend to methods of analyses and to
criteria to assess whether or not the computed response is within acceptable behavior limits.
d) Implement design detailing provisions
e) Maintain appropriate quality assurance and peer review.
Detailing, quality control and peer review are emphasized because:
a) Inelastic energy absorption capacity depends explicitly upon ductility in the structural
behavior.
b) New technology may involve judgments beyond routine engineering.
The structural design should be based on a graded approach. A graded approach is one in which
various levels of design, evaluation and construction requirements of varying conservatism and rigor
are established ranging from common practice for conventional facilities to very rigorous practices
used for more hazardous facilities. The motivation for the graded approach is that it enables design
or evaluation to be performed in a manner consistent with their importance to safety, importance to
mission, and cost.
2. Design Basis Loads
Design basis loads are derived from the internal and external events identified as the PIE (Postulated
Initiating Events) in the safety analysis. Loads and the combinations thereof should envelop loads
considered in structures per ANSI 83.
Design basis loads arise from different categories: normal operations, unlikely events, and extremely
unlikely events. The performance classification incorporates the probabilities of these events.
Loading combinations should be generated from the bounding sets of these events identified in the
safety analysis.
20
Section 32
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
3. Methods of Analysis
The method of analysis should depend on the performance category and loads being considered.
Some of the methods are described in (ASCE 80). Elastic system analysis methods may be adequate
for lower performance categories whereas for higher performance categories inelastic analysis
methods nay be required. Guidelines to seismic analysis are available in (DOD 86). Dynamic seismic
structural analysis may be performed for predicted ground motions based on geotechnical site specific
information including variability using response spectra or time history. For large embedded
structures, soil structure analysis may be considered.
4. Acceptance Criteria
For lower performance categories, and for normal operations damage should be limited so that
hazardous materials can be controlled and confined, occupants are protected, and functions are not
interrupted. Thus damage should typically be limited in confinement barriers, ventilation systems and
filtering, and monitoring and control equipment.
For the higher performance categories, and for unlikely events, structures should be permitted to
undergo limited inelastic deformations without unacceptable damage when subjected to transient
loads. Energy absorption factors may be used to achieve appropriate conservatism in the design or
evaluation process. Stability and other post yield behavior criteria should be met.
For extremely unlikely events risk analysis should be performed to determine the extent of permissible
damage.
In design approaches where ductility and inelastic energy absorption are taken benefit of, attention
should be paid to the design details and quality assurance.
For all performance categories deformations expected from design load combinations should be able
to be withstood. If concrete is used as a pressure boundary, inelastic energy absorption should not
be considered.
5. System Interaction Effects
Any SSC whose structural failure could impact the function of SSC of a higher performance category
SSC are evaluated for interactions. To account for adverse interactions, a determination of failure
probability of an SSC given a postulated failure in the lower performance category is required.
HVAC
The application of design criteria from codes and standards for systems and components should be
applied in a graded approach relative to the significance of the safety function. For safety-class
systems and components, the design requirements of ASME AG-1 (ASME 93b) or a comparable
code or standard which considers the safety function(s) of the particular system or component should
be applied (ASME 89a and ASME 89b). For non safety-class systems and components, codes and
standards for industrial and commercial grade application should be applied. Some of the major
HVAC components that should have a graded approach application of codes and standards are fans,
dampers, ductwork, filters and filter housings and instrumentation and controls.
21
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Potential Safety Functions
The potential safety functions for confinement systems and their associated HVAC systems are:
1. Provide barriers against the release or spread of gaseous and particulate contamination during
normal and off-normal conditions (ASHRAE , ASHRAE 91 and DOE 6430.1A)
2. Provide the necessary ventilation system functional capabilities to control differential pressures
such that air flows from cleaner areas to potentially more contaminated areas during normal and
off-normal conditions. (ASHRAE 91)
Section 33
3. Provide filters or other means to remove contaminants before exhausting to the environs.
4. Maintain the required ambient conditions within confinement, e.g. temperature, pressure,
humidity, and concentrations of radiological, toxic, corrosive or explosive substances, to protect
personnel and ensure the capability of personnel or equipment to perform safety functions.
(ASHRAE 91)
5. Provide the capability to isolate and control tritium or any other contaminant released within
confinement.
6. Provide instrumentation and/or testing and surveillance to monitor the condition and capabilities
of the confinement system, the ambient conditions within confinement, and the effluents from
confinement to the environs. Applicable items should be monitored during normal and off-normal
conditions as required to ensure and verify safety function. In addition potential airborne
contaminants or corrosive agents that may compromise the ability of personnel or equipment to
perform safety functions should be monitored and controlled. (ASHRAE 91, DOE 5480.11 and
DOE 6430.1A)
Safety-Related Design Guidance
System Boundary
The confinement/HVAC system boundary is defined for each confinement barrier and includes the
contiguous structural barrier and its associated ventilation and filtration equipment.
Structural Design
Design basis loads are derived from the internal and external events identified as the PIE (Postulated
Initiating Events) in the safety analysis. Loads and the combinations thereof should envelope loads
considered in structures per ASCE 93.
The methods of analysis depend on the performance category and loads being considered. Some of
the methods are described in ASCE 80. Elastic system analysis methods may be adequate for lower
performance categories whereas for higher performance categories inelastic analysis methods may
be required. Guidelines to seismic analysis are available in DOD 86. Dynamic seismic structural
analysis may be performed for predicted ground motions based on geotechnical site specific
22
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
information including variability using response spectra or time history. For large embedded
structures, soil structure analysis may be considered.
Capacity calculations, DOE 1994a, depend primarily on the national consensus code, UBC 94. For
reinforced concrete structures DOE 1984 and ACI 318 provide the criteria for safety-class and other
building structures, respectively. For steel structures AISC Codes, ANSI 84 and AISC 86a provide
the criteria for safety-class and other building structures. AISC 86b is an alternate for AISC 86a if
load and resistance factor design procedure is used. ASME Code (ASME 93a) should be used for
equipment and components, and ASME Code (ASME 93b) for piping.
Deformation may be allowed and inelastic energy absorption credited for ductile structural materials,
especially for lower performance categories. Inelastic absorption capacity should not be credited if
concrete is used as a pressure boundary.
For lower performance categories, and for normal operations, damage may be permitted but should
be limited so that hazardous materials can be controlled and confined, occupants are protected, and
safety functions are maintained.
For the higher performance categories, and for unlikely events, structures should be permitted to
undergo limited inelastic deformations. Energy absorption factors may be used to achieve appropriate
conservatism in the design or evaluation process. Stability and other post yield behavior criteria
should be met.
Section 34
For extremely unlikely events risk analysis should be performed to determine the extent of permissible
damage.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS
Instrumentation and Control (I&C) systems include equipment and components that monitor and
display facility parameters, indicate parameter value changes, actuate equipment to maintain the
parameters within specified limits, return the facility to operation within these limits, and mitigate
conditions resulting from operation outside limits. Specific equipment includes sensors, signal
transfer media, signal processors, control circuits and actuation devices.
General Safety Design Guidance
The purpose of this section is to present the principal design criteria for the Instrumentation and
Control (I&C)Instrumentation and Control systems and components. The I&C system design should
be separated into the basic control system and the safety system. The separation of these I&C system
functions is necessary to ensure that once a safety system is called upon the control function will not
stop or impede the proper safety system function execution. Conversely, the safety system must not
interfere with the operation of the control function, when the facility or system is operating within
the normal design envelope. The basic control and the safety systems analysis and design should
ensure independence of system functions and displays with sufficient analytical margin, physical
separation, and electrical isolation to enable each system to support the others function without
interference under failure, accident, or normal operating conditions. To ensure that these basic
principles are properly addressed, the I&C analysis and design efforts must be properly integrated
between control and safety system design and with the design and analysis of the facility systems (FS)
they are intended to service.
23
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
I&C System Analysis and Design
The design of the I&C systems should be integrated with the design of the facility systems (FS) to
account for both normal and off normal operation and to prevent or mitigate postulated accidents.
The integration of the facility systems and I&C system design functions should address:
1. the capability of I&C system to provide the proper measuring, detection, and control functions,
including adequate control and safety margins,
2. the necessary taps, ports, and penetrations to obtain the most desirable measurement parameters
for control and safety function actions,
3. a central control room with sufficient displays and command features to allow monitoring and
response to all accident Postulated Initiating Events (PIE), except those that are highly unlikely,
4. automatic initiation of all safety function actuations which are not assigned to the operator,
5. feedback from control function actions to determine the effect on the process,
6. a system of interlocks and permissives to reduce the likelihood of erroneous operator action,
7. a system of controlled by-passes to permit deliberate operator action in abnormal unanticipated
situations,
8. manual initiation and control for safety function actions not appropriate for automatic initiation
or for chosen automatic action interruption or adjustment capabilities.
Control System
Basic Control systems should be designed with sufficient margin to ensure that the design conditions
are not exceeded, during any condition of normal operation including anticipated operational
occurrences and transients.
Section 35
The Basic Control System should be capable of maintaining the normal operating parameters and
should provide all operator interface (indication, alarm, and data collection), during normal operation
and anticipated operational occurrences and transients that may be created by postulated initiating
events. A Task Analysis should be conducted to determine which control functions are to be assigned
to the operator and which functions are to be machine (automatic action) assigned.
The control system design should provide for operator control and monitoring of essential facility
systems in a central control room. The control room, as well as supporting I&C system local control
and monitoring panels, should be designed for man/machine interface and local area or room
habitability considerations. This design should consider control and monitoring functions for conduct
of operations under both normal operation and postulated accident scenarios.
24
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Safety System
The Safety System should be capable of maintaining the facility within the design basis safety analysis
limits and provide operator interface (indication, alarm, data collection, and any necessary manual
interaction), during accident or off normal conditions that may be created by any PIE.
A safety system task analysis should be conducted to determine which safety functions are to be
assigned to the operator and which safety functions are to be machine (automatic action) assigned.
The operator should be provided with manual safety action initiating capability for all safety functions
and with feedback information to confirm the occurrence of the proper actuation and completion of
the selected safety function.
Safety Systems should be designed to fail safe on loss of motive force or power. In addition, safety
systems should be designed to meet single failure criteria. The system should be designed to preclude
failure of a component or subsystem from preventing completion of the required safety function.
Diversity in the monitoring of the parameters and actuation of the control systems should be a basic
principle of the safety system design.
To prevent a failure in the basic control system from degrading the operation of the safety system,
isolation should be provided between any interface of the basic control and safety systems and
separation should be provided and maintained between these systems.
Instrumentation
The process variables (parameters) that are selected to provide inputs to the I&C system should be
those which characterize the relevant safety and operational status of the monitored systems and
barriers. This selected set of variables must be analyzed to determine their adequacy to measure and
provide for the necessary control and safety functions. The analysis should include the measurability,
variability, and response action time capability of the process parameter variables and the operational
demands and limitations placed upon the control or safety system design by these parameter variable
properties.
The instrumentation selected to measure a process variable should directly measure the variable,
instead of some secondary parameter. Instrumentation should be analyzed to determine if its
reliability, accuracy, and response time characteristics satisfy the control or safety system needs for
all required operating conditions.
Section 36
Instrumentation should be provided to monitor variables of the facility systems over their anticipated
ranges for normal operation, anticipated operational transients and occurrences, and for postulated
accident conditions to ensure adequate safety and design margins are maintained.
Potential System Safety Function
The potential safety functions for the I&C Systems are:
1. Monitor and indicate by alarm off normal facility systems operating parameters or transient
conditions.
25
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
2. Display parameter values necessary for operator response to off normal systems operating
parameters or transient conditions.
3. Operate permissive or interlock functions designed to prevent facility systems from:
a) entering into off normal operating parameter or transient conditions, or
b) allowing an existing transient condition to continue its off normal excursion.
4. Operate automatically to:
a) respond to off normal or accident conditions,
b) move the facility toward or attain a safe operational state, or
c) mitigate the consequences of the off normal or accident conditions.
5. Enable operator manual initiation of safety related control actions or bypasses.
6. Detect and indicate parameters necessary to ensure the integrity of designated defense in depth
barriers. These parameters may include but are not limited to:
a) indicators of radioactive, toxic, or other material leakage or migration to detect breach
of a barrier,
b) temperature conditions indicative of trends toward undesired material conditions (e.g.,
nil ductility considerations or high-temperature loss of strength),
c) over or under pressurization detection for facility systems, or
d) chemical or gas mixture potential flammability or deflagration detection.
7. Monitor safety barriers and provide for response or mitigation action designed to prevent the
breach of a barrier or to control the effect of barrier breach.
8. Post accident monitoring or control functions necessary for indication, data logging or required
continued systems operations.
9. Measure, display, and alarm conditions approaching or exceeding parameter limits defined by
Technical Specification Requirements or Technical Standards.
Safety Related Design Standards and Criteria
The following listed standards and criteria provide a cohesive philosophy and set of principles
appropriate for application to the analysis and design of I&C Systems and components for fusion
devices. The concepts and principles contained in these documents, including referenced standards,
should be applied, using the necessary adjustments required to account for any specific fusion
technology special considerations.
26
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
These standards and criteria cover both component level and system level design feature
considerations for safety systems. Component design features necessary for safety systems include
attributes such as equipment qualification, maintainability, failure criteria and testability. In addition
to these attributes, the system level design features should include but not be limited to reliability,
independence, redundancy, human factors and separation.
Each of the standards listed below form a portion of the overall design philosophy for I&C safety
systems. As such, the design intent of all of these standards should be taken as a whole for the
analysis and design of I&C systems.
IEC 964 (1989-03)
Design for control rooms of nuclear power plants.
Section 37
IEEE 603 Standard Criteria for Safety Systems for Nuclear Power Generating Stations
IEEE 323 Qualifying Class IE Equipment for Nuclear Power Generating Stations
IEEE 352 IEEE Guide for General Principles for Reliability Analysis for Nuclear Power
Generating Station Safety Systems
IEEE 577 IEEE Standard Requirements for Reliability Analysis in the Design and Operation of
Safety Systems
IEEE 420 IEEE Standard for the Design and Qualification of Class IE Control Boards, Panels,
and Racks used in Nuclear Power Generating Stations.
IEEE 379 IEEE Standard Application of the Single Failure Criterion to Nuclear Power
Generating Station Safety Systems
IEEE 384 IEEE Standard Criteria for Independence of Class 1E Equipment and Circuits
IEEE 338 IEEE Standard Criteria for Periodic Surveillance Testing of Nuclear Power
Generating Station Safety Systems
ISA 67.02 S67.02.01: Nuclear Safety-Related Instrument Sensing Line Piping and Tubing
Standard for Use in Nuclear Power Plants
ISA 67.04 S67.04--Part I: Setpoints for Nuclear Safety-Related Instrumentation-- ANSI/ISA
1994
RP67.04--Part II: Methodologies for the Determination of Setpoints for Nuclear
Safety-Related Instrumentation-1994
ISA 67.06 S67.06: Response Time Testing of Nuclear Safety-Related Instrument Channels in
Nuclear Power Plants-- ANSI/ISA-1984
27
http:S67.02.01
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
ANSI/ANS 3.8.5-1992
Criteria for Emergency Radiological Field Monitoring, Sampling, and Analysis
ANSI/ANS 3.8.6-1995
Criteria for Conduct of Offsite Radiological Assessment for Emergency Response
for Nuclear Power Plants
IEEE 730 Software Quality Assurance Plans
IEEE 829 Standard for Software Test Documentation
IEEE 830 Guide for Software Requirements Specifications
IEEE1012 Standard Software Verification and Validation Plans
IEEE 1016 Recommended Practice for Software Design Descriptions
IEEE 1042 Guide to Software Configuration Management
IEEE 1063 Standard for Software User Documentation
Design Considerations
Diversity
In the selection of the sensors and measuring systems for the in-vessel and near vessel parameters,
multiple diverse technologies should be implemented since these instrument components will be
exposed to harsh environments (potential radiation exposure, magnetic fields, temperature gradients,
ion pulses, etc.) Unexpected failure mechanisms within a single measurement technology could lead
to erroneous control or safety actions. Provision for the use of diverse measurement technologies
in the design would provide alternative sensing capabilities and reduce the possibility of failure to
detect and initiate a safety function due to common mode or common cause failures.
Graded Approach to Defense In Depth
The failure consequence and frequency of the PIE should be considered in the determining the degree
of the redundancy and diversity required in the I&C system. Anticipated operational events of high
consequence should require an analyzed probability of successful action. This analysis should include
the presence of an undetected failure in the safety related I&C system equipment necessary to
accomplish the required safety function. Events of lower frequency and/or consequence may be
shown to be mitigated by less rigorous analysis and subsequently less rigorous I&C equipment
requirements.
28
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Response Time Requirements and Margins
Section 38
Facility system designs should be sufficiently robust, to withstand a process perturbation, without
damage or degradation, until the I&C system can detect the change in the monitored parameter,
command a change in the controlled variable and have that system return to the safe or process
normal state. The margin (allowed variation of the process parameter for the allowed time) should
be sufficient for the I&C system to detect the change in the process and respond within some defined
degree of internal delay or failure.
The Basic Control System should be reliable and exhibit adequate response time to maintain normal
fusion operations without unnecessary challenges to or actuation of the safety system. These
necessary attributes should be addressed by performance of sufficient setpoint and instrumentation
uncertainty and response time analysis to ensure adequate margins exist between normal control and
safety system setpoints and limits.
Qualification
Safety related I&C components should be qualified to perform their intended safety function for the
life of the component. Qualification should address operational requirements and environmental
requirements. Qualification for operational conditions should consider maintenance, testing, and
operation during all operational modes, such as, normal, off normal shutdown, and postulated
accidents. Qualification for environmental conditions should be limited to normal operational
environments, except for those components and systems that must remain operable during and/or
after an accident. Those I&C systems and components required to remain operable during and/or
after an accident should be environmentally qualified for the conditions they are subjected to during
the time it takes to complete their safety functions.
Seismic qualification of I&C systems and components should be considered for those items that are
required to maintain their structural integrity and operability during and after a design basis
earthquake.
Qualification requirements (if any) for systems credited in Design Basis Events should be explicitly
stated in the overall functional requirements. Additional Graded Approach guidance should be
provided to ensure consistency across Facility System Boundaries. This is important to I&C since
the I&C System crosses these boundaries.
Human Factors
A human factors analysis of the control room or local I&C panel operator interfaces with console or
panel controls, displays, indications and alarms should be performed. This includes the interface of
control room functions with local panel operations capability and the interface with digital system
displays and control and response capabilities.
Testability and Maintainability
The I&C system and components should be designed to provide the capability for performance of
periodic testing of all instruments, logic, interlocks, permissive features, bypasses, and other facility
systems. The safety system portion of the I&C system should be capable of confirming the required
calibration, setpoint and time responses with test frequencies that meet the uncertainty analysis
29
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
requirements. Test features of the safety system I&C should be able to detect failures of the system
that could degrade or prevent a safety function from occurring in the presence of a single failure.
Section 39
The I&C system should include maintainability considerations in the design process. These
considerations should include ease of replacement of components, modules, or subsystems, the access
availability of the equipment with consideration for personnel hazard conditions (radiation, magnetic
fields, temperature, proximity to steam piping or other stored energy conditions, etc.), and the
provision for sufficient bypass or disable capability and test point access to allow for the valid
performance of necessary and adequate testing.
Power
The I&C power system design should provide for the necessary redundant power sources to ensure
that the system will be capable of performing its required function under all normal and postulated
accident scenarios. Power sources that should be considered for the I&C system include
uninterruptible power sources, critical instrument busses capable of being powered from diesel
generator back up power, and battery back up systems.
Control Room Design
The design of the control room should be implemented in accordance with IEC 964 standard
guidelines, with the appropriate modifications for fusion versus fission technologies and hazards. The
underlying principles of the man/machine interface and functional analysis presented in IEC 964 are
appropriate to the design of fusion control facilities.
Adequate radiation and environmental protection should be provided to permit access and occupancy
of the control room under accident conditions where the operator monitoring, mitigative or response
actions are required during or following an accident.
Equipment at locations outside the control room should be provided to achieve and/or maintain the
facility systems in a safe or shutdown condition in the absence of the control functions designated for
that purpose.
Safety Actuation
Safety function actuation should be sealed in, so that the safety function actuation is maintained even
if the logic that initiates the actuation is lost.
Monitoring
Monitoring of after-heat removal after-heat removal (and normal operating heat removal) should
include sufficient information processing and displays to present the heat balance and energy transport
and verify parameters are within the expected ranges. Higher order logical processing and display
may be required to present operators with an integrated picture of the fusion heat removal system.
The input sensors, algorithms, software and hardware required for this safety-significant activity
should meet appropriate reliability standards.
The inherent robustness of the facility confinement systems should be analyzed (and demonstrated)
to show survivability during PIE with the worst case performance of the I&C System. The design
30
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
basis (or Graded Approach) should specifically describe the requirements for coupling PIE and
internal transients; the influence of PIE on parameter measurements, uncertainties and response times
should be evaluated for those scenarios requiring coupling of events.
Monitoring of the inventory levels and barrier integrity should address the Postulated Initiating Event
of concern. Active detection and venting to expansion volumes must meet the response times
assumed in the analysis criteria. Passive designs for channeling coolant to the expansion volume
should be considered.
TRITIUM SYSTEMS
General Safety Design Criteria
Section 40
Tritium system tritium system design should include features which minimize the environmental
release of tritium and exposure of personnel, minimize quantities of tritium available for release during
accidents or off-normal events, and minimize the unintended conversion of elemental tritium to an
oxide form. Consistent with facility safety analysis, design features should include:
1. Segmentation of the tritium inventory such that release of all tritium from the single largest
segmented volume has acceptable consequences,
2. Confinement barriers1 to reduce tritium environmental release to an acceptable level,
3. Materials and equipment which are tritium compatible and minimize exposure of tritium to
oxygen, and
4. Cleanup systems to recover gaseous tritium released within any confinement barrier or to process
streams exhausting to atmosphere.
Tritium system functions should be designated safety functions if they are credited in the facility safety
analysis in order to meet prescribed safety criteria. Systems or components needed to perform safety
functions should be designated safety-class systems or components. Components which do not
perform safety functions but whose single failure causes the failure of a safety function should be
designated safety-class components.
Generic System Description
The following sketch illustrates the tritium system consisting of five major functional areas within
multiple confinement barriers:
Primary confinement, a sealed system rated for design maximum pressure and low leak rate, is the
1 This document considers the tritium containment system to be a type of confinement. Sealed high-
integrity process equipment and piping provide the containment system, for vacuum and pressure conditions,
and constitute the primary confinement barrier. The secondary confinement barrier consists of gloveboxes and
cabinets which house the primary confinement (containment) system. To complete the secondary
confinement, process piping between glove boxes or cabinets are within a jacket enclosure which seals to the
glovebox or cabinet. Additional sealed cabinets or rooms may extend the concept to tertiary, quaternary or
higher orders of confinement in accordance with the facility’s safety analysis.
31
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
primary barrier for tritium. Although primary confinement is sealed and leak tight, tritium is an
elusive molecule and small tritium leaks will occur inevitably. Secondary confinement, a system with
controlled outflow, collects the leaked tritium in a recirculating nitrogen (or inert) gas stream for
subsequent recovery of the tritium. Secondary confinement operates at a subatmospheric pressure,
by virtue of a small purge stream to the exhaust stack, and thus is unlikely to leak tritium to the
tertiary or higher order confinements.
Personnel may not enter primary confinement or secondary confinement zones during normal
operation. They may enter for maintenance activities, and only after tritium removal is complete for
the affected systems.
Personnel may routinely occupy the tertiary or higher order confinement zones without wearing
protective clothing and respiratory equipment. But personal protective equipment (PPE) is available
for rapid donning if the safety analysis reveals a credible event wherein tritium enters tertiary or a
higher order confinement zone.
Section 41
The tritium facility’s heating and ventilation system (H&V) promotes the confinement concept by
maintaining pressure differentials such that air flow is always towards zones with greater
contamination potential. In the above sketch, fresh air enters the quaternary zone then flows to the
tertiary zone from which it discharges to a stack.
32
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
H&V Supply
Tritium
Transfer
Tritium
Purification
Tritium
Recovery
Tritium
Storage
System
Cleaning
S
T
A
C
K
Tertiary Confinement
Quaternary Confinement
H&V Exhaust
H&V Transfer
Recirculating Gas
Primary Confinement
Secondary Confinement
Fresh Air
Inlet
Figure II-1. Tritium confinement scheme.
The function of each major tritium area within primary confinement is as follows:
Tritium Storage
The tritium inventory resides in the storage medium unless it is undergoing transfer, recovery,
purification or burning in the fusion machine. The storage medium can be tankage or hydride
beds.
Tritium Transfer
The transfer function moves tritium from one part of the primary confinement to another or to
the fusion machine vacuum vessel or a pellet process. The transfer motive force can be either
residual differential pressure, or active pumping, or thermal cycling of a hydride bed, or all three.
33
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Tritium Recovery
The recovery function recovers the small amounts of tritium that invariably escape from the primary
confinement during operations and maintenance. Recovery involves removing tritium and any
deuterium or protium isotopes from the secondary confinement volume and holding the isotopes for
subsequent processing in the purification function. The recovery process can use zeolite beds or
metal hydride beds.
! A primary recovery system operates continuously, and recovers tritium from small leaks
occurring during normal operation.
! A secondary recovery operates on demand and provides a greater tritium recovery capacity
necessary for large leaks or maintenance operations.
! A purge recovery system maintains the secondary confinement at a subatmospheric pressure by
exhausting continuously some of the secondary confinement atmosphere to the environment.
The purge system recovers tritium from these exhaust flows.
Tritium Purification
The purification function removes the hydrogen isotopes protium, deuterium and tritium from other
gases and then separates the tritium isotopes from protium and deuterium. The purification process
can use thermal diffusion columns or cryogenic distillation or a chromatographic process or
(preferred) a thermal cycling absorption process. The thermal cycling absorption process uses a
palladium-coated kieselguhr2 hydride bed which, upon temperature cycling, separates tritium from
protium and deuterium.
System Cleaning
The cleaning function operates on demand and cleans impurities (suspended solids, oils, moisture,
halides, etc.) from the tritium systems. Cleaning uses various detergents, chlorinated fluorocarbons,
solvents and water, followed by vacuum drying to <10-2 torr. Removal of impurities is important to
prevent stress corrosion cracking of stainless steel and contamination of the fusion machine’s vacuum
vessel.
Potential System Safety Functions
The potential safety functions for the tritium systems are:
Normal Operation:
Section 42
1. Provide for primary and secondary confinement barriers that separate tritium from onsite and
offsite personnel and the environment. If the safety analysis requires tertiary or higher levels of
confinement, the tritium systems should provide the additional barriers. This safety function
includes the structures, systems and components necessary to establish the barriers and the power
sources necessary to maintain the barrier operation within prescribed safety limits.
2 loose or porous diatomite
34
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
2. Provide for monitors and signals or alarms dictating a need to isolate or otherwise control a
tritium system to prevent monitored system variables exceeding a safety limit. The safety analysis
should identify the system variables requiring monitoring, which will normally include system
pressure, oxygen inleakage and tritium out leakage from a confinement barrier.
3. Provide for recovery from anticipated off-normal events by providing systems that remove tritium
from secondary and greater confinements and from any air stream exhausting a confinement to
the environment.
Maintenance:
1. Provide for primary confinement of tritium during maintenance within secondary, tertiary or any
greater levels of confinement barriers.
2. Provide for tritium removal, evacuation and cleansing of primary confinement systems prior to
breaking the primary confinement barrier for maintenance. This preparation for maintenance will
minimize the resultant tritium losses.
Design Basis Accidents:
The safety analysis should specify design basis accidents. Tritium systems design should implement
requirements and provide for corresponding safety functions to make the accident consequences
acceptable.
A typical frequency for design basis accidents is P>10-6/year. The safety analysis will specify the
actual frequency. The quantity and form of tritium released during a design basis accident will
determine the consequences of the accident. Probability and consequence are the parameters
determining risk. The following are potential design basis accidents for tritium systems:
Internal Initiators
1. Tritium fire or detonation
2. Missile or pipe whip resulting from sudden failure of high energy system. This accident has
potential for causing a release of tritium and simultaneously disrupting multiple confinement
barriers.
3. Human errors
External Initiators
1. Natural phenomena, including earthquakes, hurricanes, tornadoes, floods, tsunami, etc.
2. Aircraft and other missile impact (excluding sabotage).
Beyond Design Basis Accidents:
There are no system safety functions required for beyond design basis accidents.
35
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Beyond design basis accidents include internal and external initiators whose frequency is lower than
the design basis frequency limit specified in the safety analysis.
Safety-Class Design Standards and Criteria
For safety-class tritium systems, the following design standards and criteria should apply to the
system, structures or components:
Structural
General
The tritium systems boundary is the pressure (or vacuum) confinement barrier afforded by the piping,
fittings, vessels, valves, and instrumentation that are wetted on their interior surfaces by tritium. The
boundary extends to the first or second isolation valve in system piping to the fusion device’s vacuum
vessel.
Loads
1. Individual Loads
Section 43
Tritium systems should withstand the static load, vacuum, normal operating pressure, normal
operating thermal load, electromagnetic loads (normal operating and fault), interaction loads from
adjacent systems, natural phenomena hazard loads and loads due to missile impact and hydrogen
detonation (if these are design basis accidents, see Section IV).
a) Static Load - The static load should include the weight of the equipment identified as
constituting the system (or component), and any supported hardware.
b) Vacuum Load - The vacuum load should include forces arising from complete vacuum
within the primary confinement barrier. A vacuum of <10-2 torr within the primary
confinement system is customary for cleansing prior to and following maintenance,
inspections, etc.
c) Normal Operating Pressure - Normal operating pressure loads should range up to and
include the design pressure of the system or components.
d) Normal Operating Thermal Load - The normal operating thermal load should include
temperatures associated with routine processing operations, both cryogenic and elevated,
and elevated bakeout conditions required for cleansing prior to equipment removal.
e) Electromagnetic Loads - Electromagnetic loads should include the forces induced as a
result of power, instrument and control and eddy currents in the tritium system interacting
with magnetic fields of the fusion machine’s normal operation.
f) Electromagnetic Loads During Faults - Electromagnetic loads should include the loads
induced during abnormal operating events such as control failures, power supply failures,
bus opens or shorts, or magnet faults.
36
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
g) Interaction Loads - Interaction loads should include the loads imposed on the tritium
systems by adjacent systems during normal or fault conditions.
h) Natural Phenomena Loads - Natural phenomena hazard loads should include loads
resulting from earthquake, wind, flood, tsunami and seiche. UCRL-15910 provides
guideline methods for establishing load levels and for evaluating the response of
structures, systems and components to the load levels.
i) Hydrogen Detonation Loads - Hydrogen detonation loads should include the mechanical
and thermal effects of tritium, deuterium and protium ignition or detonation, if the safety
analysis includes such failure as a design basis accident.
j) Missile Impact Loads - Missile impact loads should include missiles and pipe whip
resulting from failure of high energy systems, if the safety analysis includes such failure
as a design basis accident.
2. Combined Loads
Table I-1 lists the load combination which the design should consider for normal and anticipated off-
normal operations.
Because maintenance involves isolating, depressurizing and evacuating a system, the load during
maintenance is the static load only.
3. Cyclic Loads
Tritium systems are subject to thermal and pressure cyclic loadings during normal and anticipated off-
normal operation and maintenance. An evaluation should determine if a formal fatigue analysis is
necessary. ASME 93a or comparable computational methods provide criteria for the evaluation
which should use a conservative analysis for the number of cycles and service life including the
expected changes in material properties with time.
Structural Acceptance Criteria
Section 44
Tritium systems that are safety-class should have design, fabrication, inspection and testing in
accordance with a recognized safety-class code such as the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
The specific codes and criteria selected should be commensurate with the level of safety required and
should have a technical justification.
Tritium systems that are NOT safety-class should have design, fabrication, inspection and testing in
accordance with a recognized national consensus code such as the ANSI/ASME Standard B31.3
“Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refinery Piping” (ANSI 93).
Structures, systems and components near a tritium system should be safety-class if their credible
failure could impact the safety function of a tritium system.
37
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Deflection Analysis
An analysis of tritium system deflections over the full range of temperatures, vacuums and pressures
should confirm no interferences or loss of confinement integrity.
Testing and Inspection
Non-destructive testing and inspection of safety-class welds, vessels, piping and valves should be in
accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code (ASME 93a). Personnel qualification
and weld acceptance criteria should also be in accordance with ASME 93a.
Testing and inspection should occur before initial operations. The hazards associated with testing
of contaminated systems, processing of the contaminated test medium, and increased potential for
environmental losses of tritium, may impede subsequent periodic testing and inspection. Any system,
subsystem, or component, that is determined to require periodic testing and inspection should be
identified during the design of that system so that the test requirements are incorporated into the
design.
Computational Methods Validation
Computer codes or other computational methods supporting the design of tritium systems should
have validation and verification for the range of normal and off-normal operations including design
basis accidents. This validation and verification should support the use of the computational method
in each intended application.
Materials
Radiation
Materials of construction should be qualified for the lifetime radiation environment. The structural
design analyses should use conservative end-of-life properties. If a component’s expected lifetime
is less than the system’s lifetime, design should provide for component replacement.
Radiation environment refers principally to external sources of radioactive energy, but it includes the
beta energy of tritium decay also.
Thermal
The structural design analyses should use material properties appropriate for the operating conditions.
If no published materials property data exist for a particular operating temperature, tests should
establish the material properties at the temperature.
The ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code (ASME 93a) imposes temperature limits for structural
designs. For items whose design complies with the Code and whose temperature could exceed the
Code’s limit, the design analyses should reduce allowable stress to an acceptable value determined
by testing the material at the elevated temperature.
38
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Tritium Embrittlement
The structural design analysis should use material properties based on tritium and helium
embrittlement for the projected end-of-life.
Penetrations of Confinement Systems
Penetrations should meet the same materials requirements as the penetrated confinement system.
Section 45
Instrumentation and Controls
Tritium systems design should provide for instrumentation and control to monitor parameters
important to the safety function for normal operation and design basis accidents. The safety analysis
should identify and the design should implement:
1. Instruments to monitor safety-related variables. Primary confinement will typically provide
monitoring for pressure, vacuum, temperature, and the ability to provide batch-based qualitative
gas analysis. Secondary confinement will typically provide for tritium detection, pressure (relative
to ambient or tertiary confinement), and oxygen level (if secondary has a reduced oxygen
atmosphere). Subsequent levels of confinement will provide monitoring abilities commensurate
with the hazard anticipated and the operating conditions of the barrier.
2. Controls to maintain measured variables within prescribed limits and to isolate tritium subsystems
when necessary for safety reasons.
3. The design for safety-class systems, including their ventilation systems, should incorporate
sufficient redundancy and/or diversity to ensure that a single failure will not result in total loss of
instrumentation or control for a safety function.
The power supply for safety-class instrumentation and controls should meet the requirements for
Class 1E electric power systems (IEEE 308).
The different designs and operating characteristics of fusion facilities limit the amount of specific
guidance that these criteria can provide. Existing DOE and NRC design requirements and guidance
documents (IEEE 603, DOE 6430.1A, NUREG-0800, 10CFR50(A), USNRC Regulatory Guides
(RG 1.100 - RG 1.89)) provide helpful general guidance for implementing these criteria at a particular
fusion facility.
Confinement Systems
Tritium systems design should provide for confinement barriers to reduce tritium releases to an
acceptable level. The safety analysis should define and the design should implement appropriate
robustness and leak tightness for the barriers. The confinement system should include as a minimum
primary confinement system and a secondary confinement system. Design should also provide for
tertiary, quaternary or higher orders of confinement if the safety analysis indicates these higher orders
are necessary. The assumption of a single failure within the system does not compromise the
confinement function.
39
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
The safety analysis should identify the confinement safety functions and the process conditions for
which the functions are required. The confinement systems should provide the required confinement
safety functions for normal operation, anticipated off-normal events and design basis accidents with
the assumption of a single failure in the system.
Primary Confinement Systems
All tritium systems should enclose tritium within a primary confinement that provides a low leak rate,
pressure-rated static barrier. Normally, primary confinement systems are sealed systems and are
opened only for maintenance, testing and inspection of confinement subsystems.
Electrical equipment necessary to provide the required confinement safety function should be safety-
class and should have a safety-class electrical power supply including a backup electrical power
supply (DOE 3003).
Section 46
Opening a confinement subsystem requires prior removal of tritium and cleansing. Cleansing steps
that exhaust to the atmosphere should exhaust through a tritium removal system to limit the release
of tritium to the environment consistent with release limits and ALARA principles. The safety
analysis should prescribe limits for tritium releases to the environment. The exhaust from a
confinement subsystem may be through a dedicated tritium removal system or through a secondary
confinement subsystem which has an tritium removal system. The tritium removal systems should
have capacity to recover from a design basis tritium release from primary confinement.
10CFR50(I) provides specific methods and evaluation criteria that are acceptable in implementing
ALARA with respect to exhaust systems from a confinement system. DOE 6430.1A provides
additional guidance for design of confinement systems. RG 1.140 provides guidance for design,
testing and maintenance for exhaust system cleanup systems.
Secondary and Higher Order Confinement Barriers
A secondary confinement barrier should enclose the primary confinement system. Tritium systems
should also have tertiary or higher orders of confinement in accordance with requirements of the
safety analysis. Secondary and higher order confinement barriers should comply with the criteria of
this section.
Secondary confinement barriers should have a recirculating nitrogen or inert gas atmosphere. For
the purposes of this document, when the term “inert” is used in reference to the confinement
atmosphere, any combination of reduced oxygen environments is intended. Tertiary and higher orders
of confinement should have atmospheres as directed by the safety analysis.
Secondary and higher order confinement barriers should operate at subatmospheric pressure by
exhausting some of the atmosphere to the environment. The atmospheric exhaust should be through
an tritium removal system to limit the environmental release of tritium consistent with release limits
and ALARA principles. The safety analysis should prescribe limits for tritium releases to the
environment.
10CFR50(I) provides specific methods and evaluation criteria that are acceptable in implementing
ALARA with respect to exhaust systems from a confinement barrier. DOE 6430.1A provides
40
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
additional guidance for design of confinement barriers. RG 1.140 provides guidance for design,
testing and maintenance for tritium removal systems.
Segmented Tritium Systems
Tritium systems design should provide for segmentation of the tritium inventory to make acceptable
the amount of tritium releasable in a single event. Design should provide for isolation of each
segmented volume using valves or piping blanks. Check valves and other one-way valves are not
acceptable as isolation devices.
Release of tritium from the single largest segmented volume should not result in exceeding prescribed
dose limits or other unacceptable consequences.
Segmentation may be accomplished by either
1. Utilization of processes or devices with small inventory, or
2. Separation of the tritium inventory into isolable volumes, or
3. Storage of tritium in an immobile condition relative to the single event (e.g., metal hydride beds).
Protection For Natural Phenomena
Section 47
For the tritium systems that are safety class, including structures and components, design should
provide robustness to withstand the effects of design basis natural phenomena such as earthquake,
tornado, hurricane, flood tsunami, seiche, etc., without loss of safety function. The design should
also provide for protection of safety-class equipment and systems from potential failure of non-safety
class hardware during natural phenomena events. If protection includes isolation of safety-class
systems, the equipment, instruments and electrical systems that provide for the isolation should be
capable of withstanding the effects of design basis natural phenomena without failure of function and
should be fail-safe in the event of power loss or failure within electrical systems.
Protection from Environmental Conditions and Missiles
For the tritium systems, including structures and components, that are safety class, design should
provide robustness to accommodate the effects of environmental conditions of normal operations,
maintenance, testing and postulated accidents without loss of safety function. Safety-class tritium
systems should have robustness or protection to withstand dynamic effects of a missile, pipe whip,
or runaway plasma that may result from equipment failures and from events outside the tritium
systems if the safety analysis evaluates these as design basis accidents.
Fire Protection
The design should minimize the probability and consequences of tritium fires or explosions. Because
fire oxidizes elemental tritium to tritium oxide, a form with a much greater biological hazard, design
should place high priority on preventing fires. The design should use noncombustible or fire resistant
materials to the greatest practical extent throughout the tritium systems.
41
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Where the safety analysis evaluates fires as design basis accidents, design should provide for fire
detection and suppression systems having appropriate capacity and capability to minimize adverse
effects of fires on safety-class systems, structures and components. Rupture or inadvertent operation
of fire suppression systems should not significantly impair the safety function of tritium systems,
structures and components.
Fire suppression systems should emphasize use of dry chemical or gas suppressants. Because of the
natural affinity of tritium for water and the increased biological hazard of tritiated water, the use of
water as a tritium fire extinguishing agent should require a technical or economic justification.
Facilities that have the potential for introducing fire suppression water into a tritium contaminated
environment should provide a tritiated water collection system with the capacity to store the total
volume of fire suppression run-off. Design should provide for facilities to dispose of any tritiated
water in an environmentally acceptable manner.
Conversion of Elemental Tritium to Tritium Oxide
The design should include engineered features as necessary to minimize the potential for tritium
contact with ignition sources, water, moisture, hydrocarbons and other oxidizing sources. Because
oxidized tritium is a significant biological hazard, the design must reduce to a practical minimum the
unintended conversion of tritium to any oxidized form. This criterion recognizes that some tritium
cleanup systems convert elemental tritium to an oxide form with deliberate intent, to facilitate removal
from flowing gas streams.
Heat Removal
Section 48
The design should provide for reliable removal of total heat loading from all confinement barriers.
Total heat loading consists of tritium decay heat and equipment energy dissipation within a barrier
and heat transfer into the barrier from external energy sources.
System Cleaning
The design should provide for cleaning of tritium systems before and after installation. Tritium
systems should be able to withstand vacuum conditions necessary for cleaning purposes. Once
tritium has contaminated the primary confinement, only limited cleaning is permissible for tritium
wetted surfaces.
Tests and Inspections
The design should provide for periodic tests and inspections of structures, systems and components
related to the intended safety function. The tests and inspections should assess structural integrity,
hydrogen embrittlement, leaktightness and other parameters related to the safety function.
The design should provide for and operations should have an appropriate materials surveillance
program.
If the design does not permit periodic inspections and tests in accordance with applicable codes,
particularly for systems contaminated with tritium, the safety analysis should develop and prescribe
an acceptable testing program. The facility authorization basis should include the test and inspection
program.
42
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Design Considerations
General
The tritium primary confinement is the pressure (or vacuum) boundary, wetted routinely by tritium,
outside the fusion machine’s vacuum vessel and associated vacuum system. Gages, stubs or other
pressure-containing hardware attached to a safety-class primary confinement subsystem are safety-
class components and design should have them serve as confinement barriers for all operational and
accident modes of the tritium primary confinement.
Radiation Shielding
Radiation shielding is not a design consideration for tritium systems. Tritium decays to a stable
element, helium (3He) by emission of low energy beta radiation, maximum 0.0185 MeV and average
0.0057 MeV. The maximum range (i.e., density thickness) of beta particles, about 0.6 mg/cm2, is less
than the generally accepted 7 mg/cm2 thickness of the epidermis of the skin. The beta radiation is
easily and completely shielded by a relatively thin layer of almost any material, including the materials
of the tritium confinement system. Thus, if the primary confinement system is leak tight, tritium poses
no radiological hazard to operating personnel.
Confinement Barriers
Tritium primary confinement is a major design consideration because tritium is difficult to contain.
As noted above, tritium is not an external radiation hazard. However, when tritium is oxidized and
ingested it produces a significant internal dose. Regardless of the care taken to assure physical
integrity and leak tightness of the confinement, small quantities of tritium will escape at the various
process connections during normal operations. Additionally, an increased level of loss will occur
during maintenance operations which usually breach the primary barrier. By escaping to unwanted
areas and reacting with normally present materials, tritium can create significant biological hazards.
For example, tritiated water (tritium oxide) is a water molecule in which one or both of the hydrogen
atoms is a tritium atom rather than the normal protium, e.g., T2O, HTO, DTO. Tritiated water is on
the order of 104 times more hazardous to humans than elemental tritium. The human radiation dose
hazard is through inhalation, ingestion or absorption through the skin.
Section 49
Because tritium is very mobile and can create a biological hazard, tritium systems must have barriers
to protect personnel and the environment from tritium and its compounds.
As a minimum, a tritium system should have primary and secondary confinements. If the safety
analysis determines that tritium systems, or certain components, require tertiary or higher order
confinements, the design should provide for these confinements in a similar manner as secondary
confinement as discussed below.
The primary confinement system should consist of piping, tubing, valves, fittings, equipment and
instrumentation components that define the pressure boundary of the tritium systems. The primary
confinement system is normally a closed system in direct contact with tritium and containing it for
conditions ranging from vacuum to full system pressure. Physical integrity is assured by compliance
with the applicable ASME Code for boiler and pressure vessels, or equivalent Codes. If the safety
analysis determines a portion or all of tritium primary confinement to be a safety-class system, the
43
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
associated individual components are safety-class and the design should consider them as the primary
confinement barrier for all operational and design basis modes.
Secondary confinement includes the 1) barriers that enclose the primary confinement and 2) systems
that ventilate the secondary confinement volumes. If the safety analysis deems a portion or all of
secondary confinement to be a safety-class system, the associated individual barrier components are
safety-class and the design should consider them as confinement barriers for all operational and design
basis modes. Examples of secondary confinement systems are glove boxes, sealed enclosures, bell
jars, double jacketed vessels/duct work/piping, and stripper/scrubber systems. Ventilation systems
for secondary and higher order confinement volumes will operate at a negative pressure relative to
the ventilation systems of zones occupied by personnel. The negative pressure will assure that any
air flow between zones will flow from personnel zones and into the zones that could be confining a
tritium release.
Structural Design Codes
The design, fabrication, testing and inspection of safety-class tritium structures, systems or
components should be in accord with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code (ASME 93a), or
to a comparable safety-related code.
Either ASME Code Section III, Class 1 or 2 or the comparable elements of ASME Code Section
VIII, Division 2 may apply for pressure vessels. For tritium systems, ASME Code Section III is
acceptable. ASME Code Section VIII is acceptable if the design uses additional standards in areas
such as attached valves, pumps, piping and supports, enhanced quality assurance and tritium/helium
embrittlement effects which are comparable to relevant parts of ASME Code Section III.
In general, the designer should prepare a detailed comparison between ASME Code Section III and
the comparable code, for safety-class systems, and demonstrate comparability. The designer should
prepare this comparison early in the design phase and the safety regulatory or licensing authority
should endorse the comparability to ensure acceptability for construction. Finally, this document does
not address the actual stamping of a vessel or component complying with Section III or VIII; this is
a decision among the owner, fabricator and the cognizant regulatory agency.
Section 50
Hydrogen Fire and Detonation
Hydrogen fire and detonation are potential hazards which the safety analysis may declare design basis
accidents (typical frequency > 10-6/year). If tritium primary confinement is a safety-class system,
it must retain a required integrity during and after a fire or detonation event, although the non-safety
related functions of the confinement can be compromised. If it is not a safety class, the tritium
primary confinement may fail in a fire or detonation event, but the failure should not degrade the
function of an adjacent safety-class system, structure or component.
Hydrogen Fires
The hydrogen isotopes tritium, deuterium and protium leak easily and can form a highly flammable
mixture with air. Hydrogen and air mixtures can ignite and sustain a flame over a very wide range
of composition, from 4% to 74% by volume of hydrogen, at room temperature and pressure (Hord
78). A minimum limit of 9% is needed to sustain a coherent flame. At room temperature and
44
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
pressure, a spark energy of 0.02 millijoule can ignite a stoichiometric mixture (29.5% tritium by
volume). The potential for hydrogen fires can be minimized through leak prevention, elimination of
ignition sources, reduction of available oxygen, and/or increased ventilation.
Hydrogen Detonations
The mode of burning in which the flame travels at supersonic speeds is called detonation. Heated to
a high temperature, a mixture of hydrogen and air can spontaneously ignite and detonate. This
temperature is the spontaneous ignition temperature which is a function of composition, pressure and
container size. At one atmosphere of pressure, this temperature is about 540°C. Favorable
conditions for detonation are stoichiometric mixture (29.5% hydrogen by volume), high energy
ignition sources and confining surroundings. Unconfined hydrogen-air mixtures do not detonate
unless the ignition source delivers considerable energy in the form of a shock wave.
For a potential hydrogen fire or detonation to be a design basis accident, the safety analysis should
evaluate the frequencies of the required conditions occurring at the same time:
1. Hydrogen isotopes in sufficient concentration,
2. Oxygen in sufficient concentration, and
3. High temperature or ignition source.
To preclude a tritium fire or detonation as a design basis accident, the safety analysis must
demonstrate a low event frequency, typically <10-6/year.
Design features that promote a low event frequency include:
1. Leak tight primary confinement to prevent out leakage of tritium to the secondary confinement,
2. Inert gas in the space between primary confinement and secondary confinement barrier walls, to
prevent oxygen contacting tritium,
3. Monitors to detect tritium out leakage or oxygen inleakage,
4. Minimize ignition sources or high temperatures near the primary or secondary confinement
barriers, and
5. Utilize NFPA rated enclosures (NFPA 70) for electrical equipment in a location potential for
contact with flammable mixtures exist.
Metal Embrittlement
Almost all metals will absorb hydrogen gas in a thin surface layer from which hydrogen will diffuse
deeper into the metal. Additionally, some of the hydrogen isotope tritium will decay to helium-3.
With time and continued exposure, both the diffused hydrogen isotopes and the tritium decay product
helium will embrittle the metal.
Section 51
Embrittlement alters the material properties of some metals significantly, by reducing ductility which
leads to failure by crack growth at ambient temperature. In addition, some metals containing helium
45
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
can crack at elevated temperatures, including welding temperatures, by bubble agglomeration and
creep crack growth.
Design should eliminate embrittlement as a design issue by considering in the choice of materials a
lifetime projection of pressures and temperatures and exposure to hydrogen isotopes.
Exchange with Hydrogen, Hydrogenated Compounds, and Hazardous Wastes
Tritium will readily exchange with a hydrogen atom in water, oils and almost all other hydrogenated
compounds. Tritiated water and some tritium hydrocarbon compounds are absorbed quickly into the
human body where the beta energy of tritium decay can cause biological damage. When tritiated,
mercury, oils and other hazardous wastes become mixed waste with a significant disposal cost.
The design should avoid use of water, moisture, mercury, hydrocarbons (oils), plastics, asbestos or
elastomeric gaskets and other hydrogenated compounds that could contact tritium. Gaskets and O-
rings in contact with tritium should not use elastomers or plastics or asbestos; tritium will degrade
them and cause premature failure. Ultra-high molecular weight polyethylene (UHMWPE) is an
exception to this rule; see “Recommended Design Practices” below.
Components of Primary Confinement System
Piping, pumps, valves and pressure relief devices should meet all pressure requirements and vacuum
requirements for the primary confinement, and should comply with applicable ANSI/ASME standards
(ASME 89d, ASME 93a, ASME 93b).
Welded joints are preferable to compression fittings which are preferable to threaded fittings. Welded
joints or mechanical joints are acceptable for piping enclosed in a secondary confinement glove box
or cabinet. But outside glove boxes or cabinets, piping should have all welded joints. Pumps should
comply with National Electrical Code requirements for explosion proof installation (NFPA 70), and
should not use organics, hydrocarbons or other volatiles for surfaces that will contact the tritium
process gas. Valves should meet prescribed leak requirements across the valve seat and from the
valve bonnet and body.
Recommended Design Practices
Materials of Construction for Primary Confinement
Recommended Materials
For the primary confinement system for tritium, the recommended materials of construction are
austenitic stainless steels:
Type 304-L,
Type 316, or
Type 316L.
46
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
In addition, the following materials for instruments, gaskets and seals of the primary confinement
system can contact tritium without detriment in the pressure and temperature ranges of most tritium
systems:
Copper,
Aluminum,
Nickel,
Silver,
Type 304 stainless steel,
Stellite, or Nitronic 60® (Titanium Corporation of America)
Vespel®, and
Indium.
For cryogenic processes, Type 316L austenitic stainless steel is the recommended material of
construction.
The design should give particular attention to avoid conditions that could cause stress corrosion
cracking of austenitic stainless steels.
If the performance of a particular material in a hydrogen environment is not well known, the designer
should perform bench tests to establish performance in simulated operating and accident conditions.
Materials Not Recommended
Section 52
The design should avoid use of the following materials of construction and materials of operation for
tritium primary confinement:
Metals that are susceptible to embrittlement and cracking upon exposure to hydrogen,3
Water
Hydrocarbons (oils)
Mercury,
Iron oxide contamination on either the tritium wetted surface or an outside surface as a
contaminant,
3 Precipitation hardened steels (e.g., 17-4 PH, 15-5 PH) are especially subject to embrittlement by
tritium and helium. Some metals including some type 300 stainless steels containing helium alone can crack
at elevated temperatures, including welding temperatures, by bubble agglomeration and creep crack growth.
47
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Materials capable of forming methane,
Elastomers, plastics or asbestos. An exception is the use of ultra-high molecular weight
polyethylene (UHMWPE) as a step tip in automatic valves. Valves will remain leak-tight longer
with an UHMWPE step tip than with a metal tip (e.g., stellite).
Carbon steel is significantly more susceptible to hydrogen embrittlement than Type 300-series
stainless steel and is not a recommended material for primary confinement. Additionally, at elevated
temperatures, carbon steel is vulnerable to hydrogen combining chemically with carbon,
decarbonizing the metal, forming methane and causing cracking and blistering.
Piping
The recommended piping construction method is welding in accordance with the applicable
ANSI/ASME standard (ASME 89d). Design should minimize the use of mechanical joints but, where
use is necessary, the recommended mechanical joint is a high vacuum connector. Mechanical joints
or welded joints are acceptable for piping enclosed within a secondary confinement glove box or
cabinet. Outside a glove box or cabinet, only welded joints are acceptable.
Metal-to-metal seals are preferable to elastomer seals. Where conditions necessitate the use of
elastomer sealing, design should provide a dual O-ring configuration with ease of replacement.
Pumps
Process requirements will dictate the selection of pumps. In addition to providing for maximum
design pressure, pumps should also have the capability of withstanding vacuum for cleaning purposes.
Therefore, the selection of pumps for normal operations should include compliance with the vacuum
specification. Pumps should not use organics, hydrocarbons or other volatiles on surfaces that can
contact the tritium process gases. Metal-to-metal pumping surfaces are satisfactory, and other
technologies may be also.
If the safety analysis indicates a pump is safety-class, it should meet the requirements of the applicable
ANSI/ASME standard (ASME 89c, ASME 93a). Pump motors should meet National Electrical
Code requirements for explosion-proof installation (NFPA 70).
Valves
Valves are components of the primary confinement, and as such, should be designed and tested to
the same standards of confinement/vacuum/leak tightness. When specifying leak rate for valves it is
necessary to understand that there are two modes of leakage; 1) across the seat, where the tritium
is still contained within primary confinement, and 2) bonnet/body leakage, where the tritium exits the
primary confinement.
Bonnet/body leakage creates a confinement problem and poses a personnel hazard potential. In
addition, recovery from the primary confinement breach requires processes to be shut down to repair
the leak. Welded, double metal bellows valve bonnets have proven to meet current leak tightness
criteria.
Section 53
48
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Metal-to-metal valve seats are preferred. An exception is the use of ultra-high molecular weight
polyethylene (UHMWPE) as a step tip in automatic valves that are not subject to high temperature
environments. Valves will remain leak tight longer with an UHMWPE step tip than with a metal tip
(e.g., stellite). During normal operation, seat leakage does not present a personnel or confinement
hazard, but it does have a major impact on process operations, accountability, operability and
volumetric segmentation. Consideration should be given to the use of double valve isolation to
mitigate the potential for valve seat leakage consequences during maintenance breaching of primary
confinement and to increase the confidence level for product purity.
Pressure Relief
Where the potential exists for the over, or under, pressurization of primary or secondary confinement
barriers, pressure relief should be provided. Pressure protection may serve as process equipment
protection without providing a safety function. For the primary confinement system, stringent leak
tightness specifications necessitate that pressure protection be through the use of rupture disks instead
of pressure relief valves, seal pots, etc. For the secondary confinement system, pressure differentials
and leak tightness requirements are not as stringent, therefore pressure protection may use seal pots,
bubblers, surge volumes, etc.
Relief valves should not be used for tritium service. Their performance is inadequate for leak tight
resealing after relief and reliable relief at low differential pressures.
Heating and Ventilation - Personnel Zones
Heating and ventilation systems should promote tritium confinement for zones occupied continuously
or intermittently by operations or maintenance personnel.
The design should provide heating and ventilation systems with pressure differentials to cause air flow
from least contaminated areas to most contaminated in tritium process areas. Ventilation pressure
in personnel zones should be greater than pressure in secondary confinement.
Primary System Cleaning
The design should include provisions to accommodate the cleaning of all tritium systems for initial
installation, particularly vacuum cleaning of the primary confinement system. After tritium has
contaminated the primary confinement’s interior, limited cleaning is permissible and this limited
cleaning must avoid use of waters or organics that could oxidize tritium.
Past Design Practice
Tritium Confinement
Some tritium facilities have used primary confinement, secondary confinement and tertiary
confinement. The minimum essential design, however, uses a primary confinement with a secondary
confinement as a cost effective and safe design for tritium operations. The following sketch illustrates
this minimum essential design.
49
zones
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Secondary confinement system pressure
is: - Negative relative to building personnel
- Positive or negative relative to primary confinement, depending on
pressure or vacuum conditions in primary
confinement.
H&V Exhaust
Building Boundary
Secondary Tritium Confinement
Purge Recovery
(Stripper)
Primary Recovery
(Stripper)
Secondary Recovery
(Stripper)
Fusion
Machine
Tritium
& Fueling Transfer
Systems System
Tritium TritiumPurification StorageSystem System
Primary
Confinement
H&V Supply Cleaning
Figure II-2. Tritium processing schematic.
Section 54
The primary confinement system encloses tritium in a sealed, low leak system rated for
all operating pressures and vacuum. Primary confinement is essentially a static, high
integrity system of process equipment and piping. There is no intent that tritium will
leave primary confinement except under controlled transfers.
But tritium is difficult to contain, even in the highest integrity systems, and some small
leakage is likely to occur. To ensure that tritium loss to the environment or exposure of
personnel is minimal, the primary confinement system is within a secondary confinement
barrier. The secondary confinement system is dynamic, depending on differential
pressures or gas flows to confine and channel tritium within certain volumes or pathways.
The secondary (or higher order) confinement system may not be sealed or leak tight.
S
T
A
C
K
50
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Metal Hydride Technology
Metal hydridemetal hydride beds technology is multipurpose and has replaced several older
technologies for tritium storage, pumping and hydrogen isotope separation. Hydride beds require less
process space than does conventional equipment.
Hydride beds are metal containers filled with other granular alloys or metals that can absorb hydrogen
isotopes when the beds are cold and desorb the isotopes when the beds are heated. Electrical, gas
or other heating and cooling systems are satisfactory. The following sketch shows nitrogen gas to
heat and cool the hydride beds via shell and tube heat exchangers.
Several types of hydride metals have been successfully used in past applications:
- LANA (lanthanum, nickel, aluminum) for pumping and storage,
- Mischmetal (calcium, mixed rare earth metals, and nickel) for compression,
- Pd/K (palladium-coated kieselguhr) for purification and separation, and
- Uranium for storage.
Tritium Storage Process
Past practices have stored tritium in conventional tankage and on metal hydride beds. Metal hydride
beds provide significant safety advantages because they are low pressure devices and, if maintained
below desorption temperature, will not release tritium should the bed wall rupture. Also, hydride
beds require less process space with no significant sacrifice of storage capacity and are the preferred
storage option for most modern applications.
Purification Process
The purification process removes hydrogen isotopes from other waste gases and then separates the
hydrogen isotopes. A palladium diffuser bed removes hydrogen isotopes from helium and other waste
gases. To separate the hydrogen isotopes from each other, past practices have used four processes:
1. Thermal Diffusion Columns,
2. Chromatograph Columns,
3. Cryogenic Distillation Stills, and
4. Thermal Cycling Absorption Process (TCAP).
51
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
The TCAP offers improved operating efficiency and a more compact process package with no
sacrifice in separative capacity. It has replaced thermal diffusion and cryogenic distillation in modern
applications. TCAP is a metal hydride bed using Pd/K (palladium-coated kieselguhr) that is
thermally-cycled to separate tritium from H2 and D2 isotopes.
The isotopes removed from the TCAP process may be stored separately on LANA storage beds for
later use.
Tritium Purification, Stripping and Recovery Processes
Purification Process
Section 55
The fusion machine will transfer some of its burned and unburned fuel gas to the tritium systems for
purification and storage. The tritium purification process will recover tritium and deuterium isotopes
by processing fuel gas through a Pd diffuser to separate tritium and deuterium from other gases. The
tritium and deuterium mixture then proceeds through a separation process such as TCAP which
separates tritium from deuterium. Separated tritium and deuterium gases go to separate storage
facilities such as LANA metal hydride storage beds.
Stripping and Recovery Processes
The tritium system will also recover the small amounts of tritium that inevitably leak from the primary
or secondary confinement. The recovery of leaked tritium involves use of a “stripper” system and
a recovery process. The stripper consists of a oxidizer-reactor , a pumping system, and zeolite beds
(Z-beds). The oxidizer-reactor incinerates elemental hydrogen isotopes to form oxides of these
isotopes (water vapors: H2O, D2O, etc.).
The recovery system will regenerate the zeolite beds and store the hydrogen isotopes prior to transfer
to the purification process. A typical system consists of magnesium or uranium beds, a pumping
system, and tanks. The magnesium or uranium beds break the hydrogen isotope oxides into O2 and
H2, D2 and T2.
The nitrogen (or inert gas) atmosphere of secondary confinement flows through the oxidizer-reactor
and any hydrogen isotopes convert to oxides (water vapors). The gases then flow through the zeolite
beds which absorb the water vapors. As a zeolite bed approaches water saturation, it goes off-line
and another (regenerated) zeolite bed comes on-line. The zeolite bed saturated with water vapors
undergoes regeneration which involves heating to drive off the water vapors. The water vapors pump
to the uranium bed which breaks the water into elemental gases. Hydrogen elemental isotopes go to
a separation process which recovers tritium for storage.
Past practices used a system of three strippers (primary, secondary, and purge systems) and one
recovery process to augment confinement and recovery of tritium.
The secondary confinement’s nitrogen or inert gas atmosphere cycles to and from the primary stripper
systems which remove any tritium that might leak from primary confinement. The secondary stripper
is available should secondary confinement accumulate a significant tritium concentration from leaks
or maintenance work.
52
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
The purge stripper maintains secondary confinement at subatmospheric pressure by exhausting a small
portion of secondary atmosphere to the environment. Secondary confinement is an enclosed, but not
sealed, system. Ventilation differential pressures will cause some building air to flow into the
secondary atmospheric, causing a gradual pressure build up. To maintain secondary confinement at
slightly below atmospheric pressure, some of the secondary atmosphere must discharge to
atmosphere through the primary and purge strippers. The purge stripper system can safely handle
all planned exhausts to the environment from tritium secondary confinement. The system includes
redundant components to assure continuous stripping capability.
Tritium Control, Accountability and Physical Protection
The purpose of requirements placed on tritium control, accountability, and physical protection at
DOE fusion facilities are:
1. Meet legal requirements for environmental releases, waste disposal, and transportation of tritium,
Section 56
2. Meet the requirements of the 10 CFR 830,
3. Prevent the diversion of the material for unauthorized use,
4. Knowledge of the process efficiency, i.e. how much tritium is produced and used in processes
under investigation,
5. Meet the requirements of the DOE Orders,
6. Increase operational safety of the facilities by providing knowledge of the location and form of
tritium,
7. Prevent unwanted buildup of tritium within a facility.
Scope
This section will primarily cover methods for the control and accountability of tritium. Tritium is the
predominate nuclear material used at fusion facilities. It is of interest because of safety concerns and
possible unauthorized diversion for military applications. Tritium will be an issue for operation of
fusion facilities since it will be a radioactive material released to the environment for operating
facilities during normal operations. Although public exposures and environmental releases are
expected to be small and well below regulatory limits, it is a radioactive material and the public will
need to be assured that safety has not been compromised.
Other radioactive materials that must be controlled at fusion facilities include depleted uranium
(U238) for storage of tritium and various radioactive sources used for checks and calibration of
radiation monitoring devices. The control and accountability of these materials is relatively straight
forward and does not present significant problems for operating facilities.
Deuterium, in quantities greater than 100 grams, is also controlled at DOE facilities. The
requirements are primarily records management. There are not requirements to perform
measurement. The accountability requirements are also straight forward and do not present concerns.
53
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
It is important to distinguish between a DOE nuclear facility and a DOE general radiological facility.
The requirements on DOE nuclear facilities are substantially greater because of the possible greater
risk to the public, the environment and the worker for accidents. The current categorization of
nuclear facility is by inventory of radioactive materials. For this document, tritium is of concern. The
current categorization is based on DOE-STD-1027-92:
Less than 1,000 Curies General Radiological Facility
1,000 to 30,000 Curies Category IV Nuclear Facility Low Hazard
30,000 Curies and up Category II Nuclear Facility Moderate Hazard
Category I is a High Hazard facility and are currently only category A reactors and other facilities as
designated by the DOE Program Secretary Office.
There are no tritium facilities in the US that are designated as Category I. It has not been determined
if a demonstration fusion power plant would be a Category I facility. The Nuclear Safety Rules and
Nuclear Safety Orders discussed in section 3 apply to all nuclear facilities.
The requirements for control and accountability in other countries is not discussed in this section.
Requirements
The requirements placed on the control and accountability of tritium fall into three categories. Those
required by the US Law, those required by DOE Orders and those required by “good practices.” It
is also important to note that requirements are not consistent throughout the international community.
There is considerable variation across the international community.
Shipping requirements are defined for international shipments.
Legal Requirements
The legal requirements on tritium measurement are of the following types:
Section 57
Environment facility emissions which included air emissions and releases to the ground water or at
facilities outfalls. These include federal and state requirements. Some of the requirements for fusion
facility that handles tritium are defined in the following laws:
1. Clean Water Act for water quality standards and effluent limitations,
2. National Environmental Policy Act for impacts of proposed activities,
3. Federal Clean Air Act which sets ambient air quality standards,
4. Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (CERCLA).
54
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
EPA regulates the type and quantity of facility emission. EPA specifies and must approve the
measurement techniques. EPA sets the limits for exposure to the public and the notification required
when certain quantities of radioactive materials are emitted. State laws usually regulate the facility
outfalls. State requirements are not uniform across the country.
Department of Transportation (DOT) transportation requirements specify packaging requirements
that are dependent on the form and quantity of tritium. DOT must also approve all packaging
containers when the radioactive material is transported on public highways.
Waste storage requirements when mixed hazardous waste may be involved. The EPA administers
the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA). In many cases this authority has been
delegated to the state.
Waste disposal requirements. These are generally state-specific. The details of the state requirements
will not be discussed in this section since they vary widely.
Nuclear Safety Rules
10CFR834 (Radiation Protection of the Public and the Environment) (proposed), and 10CFR835
(Occupational Radiation Protection): Current DOE orders that are nuclear safety related are being
reissued as “rules” that are law. Rule requirements were placed on DOE funded nuclear facilities by
the US Congress in the amendments to the Price Anderson Act.
The requirements and implications of the DOE Rules as defined in the 10CFR laws listed above are
still to be determined for tritium control and accountability. Currently, the DOE orders dealing with
nuclear materials control and physical protection will not be released as Rules. Rules specify
requirements that will result in fines and criminal prosecution (as defined in 10CFR820) if they are
not followed. The only rules that have been released are the Occupation Radiation Protection Rule
and Quality Assurance Rule. These will have implication on the procedures and techniques that are
used to determine personnel exposure to tritium and environmental releases of tritium.
Since these requirements are part of the US law, they must be followed by all facilities that handle
tritium or radioactive materials as applicable.
DOE Orders
DOE Orders are requirements placed on DOE facilities that define operations and the methods of
conducting business.
DOE 5633.3B, “Control and Accountability of Nuclear Materials” specified the minimum
requirements and procedures based on the amount of tritium and the form of the tritium in a facility.
Important requirements from this order are:
1. Tritium is treated as a Special Nuclear Material and the reportable transaction quantity is one
hundredth of a gram (approximately 100 Curies).
55
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
2. Each facility requires a Materials control and accountability (MC&A) plan the specifies the
following type of information:
a) Material location,
Section 58
b) Measure techniques, calibration methods and frequencies, DOE interlaboratory
measurement program, and accuracy requirements,
c) Personnel responsibilities,
d) Category type, Category III Greater than 50 grams or IV, and
e) Holdup analysis.
f) Inventory requirements for category III materials are semi annual with a complete
measured inventory at least annual.
g) Inventory requirements on the shipper and receivers of controlled material and methods
to control and resolve inventory differences.
Access controls, depended on the tritium form and “attractiveness” must be established.
Each facility DOE laboratory must establish an independent organization to provide oversight of the
nuclear materials control and accountability.
The physical protection requirements are specified in DOE order 5632.1C, “Protection and Control
of Safeguards and Security Interests.” The current DOE requirements are dependent on the quantity
and form. These include:
1. Control of tritium by personnel with a US DOE “Q” clearance.
2. Controlled locks, alarms and access during non working hours.
3. Other Orders specify waste requirements, environmental monitoring, and personnel protection.
These physical protection requirements will not be discussed in this section.
The DOE order requirements are in general not legal requirements. The facility can negotiate with
DOE to determine the most cost effective manner of implementing the requirements and still maintain
facility safety and material accountability.
Good Practices - Nuclear Material Locations at a Fusion Facility
Figure II-1, at the beginning of this section, is a block diagram of the primary locations, inputs and
outputs, and measurement points for tritium at a nuclear facility.
56
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Inputs to the tritium inventory at a nuclear facility are:
1. Shipments into the facility,
2. Production of tritium at the facility,
3. Locations of tritium within a facility,
4. “In Process,”
5. In system holdup,
6. In waste systems, and
7. In storage.
The exit streams of tritium from a facility include:
1. Shipments of tritium from the facility.
2. Waste streams that include:
a. Facility routine tritium stack emissions,
b. Waste water releases, and
c. Solid waste including trash and “high concentration” tritium.
3. Accidental tritium releases.
Measurement locations:
1. Input tritium shipments to the facility,
2. Exit shipments from the facility,
3. In process measurements,
4. In storage measurements,
5. Waste stream measurements,
6. Personnel exposure measurements,
7. Work place measurements, and
8. Stack emission measurements.
57
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Tritium Measurement Methods
There are two primary categories of tritium measurements that are made at fusion facilitates. The
first category of measurements determine the quantity and the location of tritium within the facility.
These measurements are generally of large quantities of tritium in high concentrations. The second
category is for environmental or safety determinations. These are generally lower concentrations and
small quantities.
This section will discuss methods for both categories. The measurements techniques for tritium can
be grouped in the three general areas:
1. Composition measurements,
2. Thermal measurements, and
3. Tritium concentration measurement.
Composition measurements determine the actual concentration determination for each atomic /
molecular species. This method can be used for gases only.
Section 59
Thermal methods (calorimetry) rely on the radioactive heat of decay of tritium. For one gram of
tritium approximately 0.333 watts is generated by decay. The temperature increase or heat
generation is measured. Calorimetry can be used for tritium in any form; either solid, liquid or gas.
The only radioactive material present must be tritium since other radioactive materials will contribute
to the thermal properties of the sample.
The final method determined the total tritium concentration by the measurement of the products or
the effects of the products of the radioactive decay. The beta particle can cause scintillation effects
or ionization effects. These effects can be measured and the concentration of tritium determined.
The following is a listing of methods that are used or proposed to be used for measurement of tritium:
1. Pressure/Volume/Temperature/Composition, using either Mass Spectrometer or laser Raman
spectrometer for the composition measurement,
2. Beta scintillation counter,
3. Self assaying tritium storage beds,
4. Scintillation counting, and
5. Ion Chamber.
Most of the techniques discussed here are batch samples, however as noted some techniques can be
used for “on-line / real time” measurements.
58
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Composition Measurements
This method is used for measurement of gaseous samples only. A representative sample of the gas
is taken. The gas that is to measured must be mixed well. The volume, pressure, and temperature
must be measured accurately. The temperature is difficult to measure accurately because of
temperature gradients caused by the heat of decay of tritium. The composition of the gas in the
sample is then measured using a mass spectrometer or a laser Raman spectrometer.
The mass spectrometer will measure all gas species. A high resolution mass spectrometer is required
to distinguish between different molecules with the same mass number. For example HT and D2 have
the same mass number, but must be separated to determine the tritium concentration. All species that
can contain tritium must be measured. This includes, water as HTO, methane as C(H,D,T)4, ammonia
as N(H,D,T)3, etc. If the approximate gas composition is known, the sum of all the species
containing tritium can be determined. If the approximate gas composition is unknown, the use of the
mass spectrometer may be difficult.
The laser Raman spectrometer is a relatively new system that can be used to measure molecular
concentrations in a gas mixture. The sample is placed in a cell with optical windows. The laser
excites the rotational or vibrational atomic levels in the gas molecules. The light emitted as the
excited levels decay back to the ground state are detected using a photodetector system. The
measurement is absolute in that the frequency spectrum of each molecule is unique. The intensity is
proportional to the amount of gas present. The disadvantages of the Raman method is that the
amount of inert gases can not be determined. Common inert gases at fusion facility are the isotopes
of helium.
Both of these techniques can be used for real time measurements. For the mass spectrometer system
a sample is bled to a high vacuum system for measurement. The Raman system is easily adopted to
real time measurements. The gas stream at atmospheric pressure is passed through an optical cell.
The spectrum for a mixture hydrogen isotopes can be determined in approximately one minute. The
total accuracy of these measurements is approximately 3 to 5 %.
Section 60
The mass spectrometer technique has been the standard method that DOE facilities have used for the
determination of the tritium inventory. It is a proven system although it requires a expensive
spectrometer ($200k) and accurate determination of the temperature, pressure and volume.
The Raman system has not been accepted. Experiments are currently being performed to demonstrate
that this will be an acceptable technique.
Thermal Methods of Inventory Measurement
The primary method to inventory large quantities of tritium in the liquid or solid form is to use a
calorimeter. The sample is placed in a thermally isolated contained. The power required to maintain
the temperature of the container is then a measure of the amount of tritium in the sample. Containers
that can accept samples that vary from several inches in diameter up to a 55 gallon drum.
The lower limit of accuracy can be as low as 100 Curies. Calorimeters are expensive (>$200k).
There require high tech electronics. They are the primary methods used to measure tritium in waste
such as HTO on molecular sieve. They have not been used to measure process tritium except in very
59
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
specific application. For example solid tritium storage beds that can be disconnected and moved have
been placed in a calorimeter designed to accept the bed.
New methods are being developed to allow for the determination of the amount of tritium stored on
a solid storage bed. When tritium is stored on uranium bed the temperature increase of the bed can
be used to determine the amount of tritium stored on the bed. When tritium is stored on a material
such as LaAlNi, usually gas is passed through the secondary containment to maintain the temperature.
The temperature rise of the gas as it passes through the bed can then be used to determine the amount
of tritium. Both of these methods are being proposed for tritium accountability. Their acceptance
is now based on a case by case system and they are not used widely.
Development of these methods will be important for the operation of fusion facilities. They offer
potential savings in time and effort to account for the tritium in a facility.
Tritium Concentration Measurement.
A beta scintillation counter has been used for tritium measurement if only the total tritium
composition is required. In this instrument, the gas is passed over a crystal that will scintillate with
the beta from the tritium decay. A photomultipier tube is used to detect the light. The tritium
concentration can then be determined from the signal from the photomultipier tube. This method is
commonly used for gas inventory requirements.
Liquid scintillation is commonly used to determine small concentrations of tritium. The tritium liquid
or compounds containing tritium are placed in a scintillation liquid. The liquid is then placed in a
counter which determines the amount of tritium by the light emitted from the sample.
Ion chambers are commonly used to determine environmental tritium releases and to monitor the
atmosphere for personnel safety. Process ion chambers are used for determining tritium
concentrations in secondary containment. Specially designed ion chambers can be used to determine
high concentrations of tritium.
Ion chambers will measure any radioactive material which can cause ion pairs. They are also
susceptible to contamination from materials which adsorb on surfaces and can only be used for gas.
Facility Measurement Recommendations.
Section 61
Measurement of tritium input / output to facility
The primary method used historically for the measurements of tritium shipments has been pressure
/ volume / temperature/ composition (PVTC) measurement with the composition determined by either
a mass spectrometer or beta scintillation counter.
Calorimeter can be used for the measurement of tritium absorbed on solid storage beds that are
designed to be used as primary shipping containers and also be placed in the calorimeter.
60
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
In Process tritium measurements
The measurement of tritium within a facility has usually been by PVTC. This requires a shutdown
of the process and transferring all the gas to a volume for sampling and measurement. This is usually
a substantial disruption of the process and will take a significant time. Tritium that is “held up” in
process cannot be directly measured. This includes tritium in walls of the system, tritium in process
components such as molecular sieve, and tritium contained within the waste disposal system. It must
be estimated by difference measurements. Real time measurements of tritium amounts are done when
tritium is moved around the facility or process. These are usually done by PVTC measurements. The
laser Raman system offers advantages for the measurement of composition as tritium flows from
location to location. The use of self assaying storage beds will greatly reduce the time required to
determine the tritium in storage.
Tritium in Waste Streams
The characterization of tritium contained in waste streams is important and one of the more difficult
measurements to make. Ionization chamber measurements, calorimetry, and difference measurements
are used to determine the tritium levels.
Stack emission measurements.
Stack emissions are determined by ion chambers. The primary method used by facilities for the
reporting to the EPA is based on a passive monitoring system. A small fraction of the air stream
exhausted from a facility is passed through a system to remove the tritium. Both liquids, such as
glycol, and solids, such as molecular sieves, are used to absorb HTO. These systems can distinguish
between HTO and HT by passing the sample through a catalyst that will convert HT to HTO. The
second collection system then collects the HT as HTO.
COOLING SYSTEMS
The cooling systems include all systems, structures and components that remove heat from the facility
and transfer it to a heat sink such that:
1. Thermal, hydraulic and mechanical parameters are within design limits for the cooling system,
fusion device, confinement barriers and other safety-class equipment.
2. A leaktight barrier is maintained against uncontrolled release of fusion ash and radioactivity to
the environment.
The cooling system includes coolant makeup systems and collection and disposal systems for spilled
or drained coolant.
Fusion devices requiring cooling systems usually radiate heat to the first wall of the plasma chamber.
The first wall re-radiates the heat to the shield wall. Cooling pipes in the shield wall remove the
majority of the heat. The divertor is a secondary but significant source of heat. Components such
as the cryostat, vacuum pumps, magnetic coils may also require component cooling.
61
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
General Safety Design Criterion
The cooling systems should remove heat from safety-class structures, systems and components and
transfer it to a heat sink such that:
Section 62
1. Thermal, hydraulic and mechanical parameters are within design limits for the cooling system,
fusion device, confinement barriers and other safety-class equipment.
2. The cooling system provides and maintains a leaktight barrier against uncontrolled release of
fusion ash and radioactivity to the environment.
The cooling systems should comply with these criteria for normal operations, anticipated off-normal
events, and design basis accidents, assuming a worst-case single failure.
Potential System Safety Functions
Cooling system functions credited in the facility safety analysis in order to meet prescribed safety
criteria should be designated safety functions. Potential safety functions for cooling systems include:
Normal Operation, Shutdowns and Anticipated Off-normal Events
1. Remove heat from safety-class structures, systems and components to maintain temperatures
within design limits. For shutdown conditions, to the extent practical, heat removal should be
passive and require no human intervention.
2. Transfer the combined heat load to a safety-class heat sink. For shutdown conditions, to the
extent practical, transfer of heat to a heat sink should be passive and require no human
intervention.
3. Confine radioactivity entrained or deposited in the coolant system, and provide for suitable
releases to environment or transfer to a waste facility.
4. Detect, measure and isolate leaks or breaks in the coolant system pressure boundary.
5. Provide makeup coolant for small breaks or leaks in the cooling system pressure boundary.
Maintenance
Maintenance of the cooling system maintenance will normally occur during shutdown of the fusion
device. Portions of the cooling system may, however, receive maintenance during normal operations.
Whether maintenance occurs in normal operation or in a shutdown condition, the cooling system will
have the following safety functions.
1. Remove heat from safety-class structures, systems and components to maintain temperatures
within design limits. For shutdown conditions, to the extent practical, heat removal should be
passive and require no human intervention.
62
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
2. Transfer the combined heat load to a safety-class heat sink. For shutdown conditions, to the
extent practical, transfer of heat to a heat sink should be passive and require no human
intervention.
3. Partially confine radioactivity entrained or deposited in the coolant system, and provide for
suitable releases to environment or transfer to a waste facility.
4. Collect coolant drained from the coolant system in preparation for maintenance.
5. Provide makeup coolant for small breaks, leaks or draining required for maintenance activities
in the cooling system pressure boundary.
Design Basis Accidents
The safety analysis should specify design basis accidents. Cooling systems design should implement
the applicable safety functions credited in the safety analysis for design basis accidents. A typical
frequency for design basis accidents is greater than 10-6/year. The safety analysis should specify the
actual frequency. The following are potential design basis accidents for the cooling systems of fusion
devices:
Internal Initiators
1. Cooling leak within vacuum vessel
2. In-Cryostat tube leak
3. Out-of-Cryostat leak
4. Loss of coolant pumping
5. Low of coolant flow
6. Loss of heat sink
7. Missile or pipe whip
8. Increase in fusion power
9. Human Error
External Initiators
Section 63
1. Natural phenomena, including earthquake, tornado, hurricane, seiche, tsunami, etc.
2. Fires
3. Aircraft or other missile impact (excluding sabotage).
63
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Potential Safety Functions
The cooling system potential safety functions for design basis accidents are:
1. Remove heat from safety-class structures, systems and components.
2. Transfer the combined heat load to a safety-class heat sink.
3. Partially confine radioactivity entrained or deposited in the coolant system, and provide for
suitable releases to environment or transfer to a waste facility.
4. For a large break in the cooling system pressure boundary:
a) Provide makeup coolant at a sufficient rate that the system’s heat removal and rejection
capacity will prevent damage of safety-class structures, systems or components while
allowing only negligible materials reactions with the coolant.
b) Collect coolant spilled from a large break to prevent damage to safety-class structures,
systems or components.
Beyond Design Basis Accidents
Beyond design basis accidents include internal and external initiators whose frequencies are lower
than the design basis frequency limit specified in the safety analysis. There are no cooling system
safety functions for beyond design basis accidents.
Safety Design Standards and Criteria
Structures, systems and components needed to perform safety functions should be designated safety
class. Components which do not perform safety functions but whose single failure causes loss of a
safety function should also be designated safety class. Included in the safety-class are:
1. Gauges, instrument tubing, sensing lines, stubs and other pressure containing hardware on the
pressure boundary of the safety-class coolant system,
2. Membrane interfaces and isolation devices between safety-class and non-safety-class coolant
systems.
The different designs and operating characteristics of fusion facilities limit the amount of specific
guidance that these criteria can provide. Existing DOE and NRC design requirements and guidance
documents provide helpful general guidance for implementing these criteria at a particular fusion
facility.
For safety-class cooling systems, the following design standards and criteria should apply to the
structures, systems and components.
64
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Structural
General
The cooling system boundary includes:
1. Heat removal, transfer and sink systems wetted on the interior by the coolant. The boundary
includes piping, fittings, vessels, valves, pumps, heat exchangers, storage tanks and instruments.
2. Coolant makeup systems
3. Spilled or drained coolant collection systems.
The cooling system design should reflect consideration of service temperatures and other conditions
of the boundary materials, the uncertainties in determining material properties, effects of irradiation
on those properties, residual, steady state and transient stresses, and size of flaws.
Loads
1. Individual Loads
Cooling systemscooling system loads should withstand the static load, normal operating pressure and
temperature, anticipated operating transients, electromagnetic loads (normal operating and fault),
interaction loads from adjacent systems, natural phenomena hazard loads and loads due to missile
impacts.
a) Static Loads - The static load should include the weight of the equipment and coolant
identified as constituting the system (or component) and any supported hardware.
Section 64
b) Normal Operating Pressure Load - The normal operating pressure load should range from
the minimum to the maximum capability of the cooling system, including the capabilities
of all pressure or vacuum sources. Additionally, the pressure load range should include
temperature induced pressures, hydrostatic test pressures and any credible pressure
augmentation resulting from small leaks between two coupled cooling systems.
c) Normal Operating Thermal Load - The normal operating thermal load should include
temperatures associated with normal processing operations, both cryogenic and
elevated, and elevated bake out conditions required for cleansing prior to equipment
removal.
d) Anticipated Operating Transients - The anticipated operating transient load should include
the pressure, flow and temperature fluctuations resulting from anticipated off-normal
events in addition to normal system start up, operations, and shut down.
e) Normal Electromagnetic Loads - Electromagnetic loads should include the forces induced
as a result of plasma operation, fusion operation, eddy currents and control changes.
Such forces will result in the cooling systems interacting with magnetic fields of the fusion
machine's normal operation.
65
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
f) Electromagnetic Loads During Faults - Electromagnetic loads induced during abnormal
operating events such as control failures, power supply failures, bus opens or shorts, or
magnet faults.
g) Natural Phenomena Loads - Natural phenomena hazard loads should include loads
resulting from earthquakes, winds, and floods. UCRL-15910 provides guideline methods
for establishing load levels and for evaluating the response of structures, systems and
components.
h) Missile Impact Loads - Missile impact loads should include missiles and pipe whip
resulting from failure of high energy systems, if the safety analysis includes such failures
as a design basis accident.
2. Combined Loads
The system structural design evaluations will be based on predicted responses for concurrent event
load combinations that are compared against the corresponding allowable stresses. In applications
involving the ASME Code for example, the evaluation of load combinations would be performed as
shown in Table II-1.
3. Cyclic Loads
Cooling systems are subject to thermal and pressure cyclic loadings during normal and anticipated
off-normal operation and maintenance. Also, systems and components are subject to vibration
loading from motors, cavitation, water/steam hammer, etc. The ASME/ANSI design codes or
comparable computational methods provide criteria for the evaluation which should use conservative
analysis for the number of cycles and service life including the expected changes in materials
properties with time.
66
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Table II-1. Design Codes For Equipment
1
CODES
EQUIPMENT Design and
Fabrication
Materials Welder
Qualification and
Procedures
Inspection and
Testing
Pressure
Vessels
Atmospheric
Tanks
0-15 PSIG
Tanks
Heat
Exchangers
Piping and
Valves
Pumps
ASME Code
Section VIII
API 650, or
AWWA D-1002
API 620
2
ASME Code
Section VIII, and
TEMA
ANSI/ASME
B31.3
Manufacturers'
Standards3
ASME Code
Section II
ASME Code
Section IX
ASME Code
2
Section II
ASME Code
Section IX
ASME Code
2
Section II
ASME Code
Section IX
ASME Code
Section II
ASME Code
Section IX
ASTM and
ASME Code
Section II
ASME Code
Section IX
ASME Code
Section II or
Manufacturers'
Standards
ASME Code
Section IX (as
Section 65
required)
ASME Code
Section VIII
API 650, or AWWA
D-100
2
API 620
2
ASME Code
Section VIII
ANSI/ASME B31.3
Hydraulic Institute
1The preferred design code for safety-class pressure retaining components is ASME Code.
2Fiberglass-reinforced plastic tanks may be used in accordance with appropriate articles of Section
X of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for applications at ambient temperature.
3Manufacturers' standard for the intended service. Hydrotesting should be 1.5 times the design
pressure.
67
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Structural Acceptance Criteria
Cooling systems that are safety-class should have design, fabrication, inspection and testing in
accordance with a recognized safety-class code such as the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
(ASME 93a). The specific codes and criteria selected should be commensurate with the level of
safety required and should have a technical justification. Where ASME design is not feasible, such
as in the case of unique materials or designs, the alternate codes may be used. Piping and equipment
supports should be designed to AISC N690 and ASME 95.
Cooling system components that are not safety-class should have design, fabrication, inspection and
testing in accordance with a recognized national consensus code such as the ANSI/ASME Standard
B31.3 “Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refinery Piping.”
Deflection Analysis
An analysis of cooling system deflections over the full range of temperatures, vacuums and pressures
should confirm no interferences or loss of pressure boundary integrity.
Testing and Inspection
The design of structures, systems and components of the safety-class cooling system should permit
initial and periodic testing and inspection of important areas and components to assure integrity and
capability to perform the safety function. The design should also permit a materials surveillance
program.
Non-destructive testing and inspection of safety-class welds, vessels, piping and valves should be in
accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code (ASME 93a). Where ASME design
is not feasible, such as in the case of unique materials or designs, alternate codes such as those listed
in Table II-1 may be used with justification. Weld acceptance criteria should be in accordance with
the requirements of codes listed in Table II-1.
Computational Methods Validation
Computer codes or other computational methods supporting the design of cooling systems should
have validation and verification for the range of normal and off-normal operations including design
basis accidents. This validation and verification should support the use of the computational method
in each intended application.
IEEE standard 730-1984, “IEEE Standard for Software Quality Assurance Plans” describes the
validation and verification process.
Materials
The cooling system boundary materials and design should provide sufficient margin to assure that,
when stressed, the boundary behaves in a non-brittle manner with a very low probability of rapidly
propagating fracture.
68
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Coolant should be compatible with structural materials which it may contact during normal operation,
off-normal events and design basis accidents throughout the range of anticipated physical parameters.
Table II-2 lists the materials requirements. Alternative codes and standards may be used with
appropriate justification.
Table II-2 Applicable DOE Orders and Design Standards
DOE 6430.1A General Design Criteria
Section 66
IEEE-308 Power Systems Criteria
IEEE-323 Equipment Qualification
IEEE-338 Periodic Testing
IEEE-344 Seismic Qualification
IEEE-379 Single Failure Criterion
IEEE-383 Electrical Cable Qualification
IEEE-384 Electrical Separation Criteria
IEEE-603 Criteria for Power and I&C
Instruments and Controls
The cooling system design should provide for instrumentation to monitor safety related variables and
controls to maintain the variables within design limits.
The cooling system design should provide for instruments that detect and measure abnormal leakage
and controls to isolate or mitigate the leak.
To the extent practical, the primary mode of actuation of safety functions should be automatic and
should be initiated by detection and control channels of suitable diversity and redundancy.
Provisions should be made for manual monitoring and actuation of safety functions.
Instrumentation and controls should be able to perform their intended safety function assuming a
single failure.
The power supply for safety grade instrumentation and controls should meet the IEEE Standard
requirements for Class 1E power systems.
69
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Passive Systems
For shutdown conditions, the cooling system design should incorporate passive features to the extent
practical for heat removal, transfer and rejection functions. The design objective should be to provide
adequate cooling of all safety-class structures, systems and components without human intervention
for as long a period as practical following shutdown of the fusion device.
Design Considerations
Cooling system structures, systems and components should be designed, fabricated, constructed and
tested to the highest quality standards practical.
Cooling system design should provide defense in depth through multiple confinement barriers and
redundant or diverse critical components or systems.
Unavailability of the onsite electrical power supply or the offsite power supply should be a
consideration in assuring cooling system functions, assuming a single failure within the cooling
system. Coincident failure of offsite and onsite power systems should not be a design consideration.
Cooling system design should consider the thermal, hydraulic and mechanical effects of unintended
operation of active components such as valves and pump motors.
Cooling system design should consider the thermal, hydraulic and contamination effects of cross leaks
between adjacent systems, such as the primary and secondary sides of heat exchanger.
Materials properties for cooling systems should include the effects of radiation embrittlement at all
levels of service temperatures.
Coolant system pumping should provide for coolant flow coastdown to prevent exceeding design
limits for safety-class structures, systems and components.
Discharge of coolant for pressure relief should be to a confinement tank that maintains the
confinement function of the coolant system.
The coolant system should include protection for overpressure to prevent degradation of safety
function.
The coolant system should include provisions for sampling for analysis of coolant properties and to
identify entrained radioactivity or other contaminants.
The coolant system design should minimize the number of interfaces between safety-class systems
and non-safety-class systems.
Coolant system design should include provisions for maintenance and radiation protection.
Cooling system design should include features to facilitate decontamination and decommissioning at
the end of service life.
Section 67
70
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Recommended Design Practices
Use of a primary cooling system and a secondary cooling system is the recommended design to
comply with the general design criterion for containment of radioactivity assuming a single failure.
Closed heat exchangers are the recommended coupling between primary and secondary cooling
systems.
Use of multiple cooling loops in the primary and secondary systems is recommended as a design
feature to reduce the operational thermal-hydraulic transient associated with single (loop) failure.
Components and headers of systems should be designed to provide individual isolation capabilities
to ensure system function, control of system leakage, and allow system maintenance.
The use of leak before break (LBB) is recommended in the analysis of pipe break accidents. The
methodology described in section 3.6 of the Standard Review Plan, NUREG-0800 is recommended.
Generic System Descriptions
Fusion devices requiring cooling systems will usually radiate heat to the first wall of the plasma
chamber. The first wall will re-radiate heat to the shield wall. Cooling pipes in the shield wall will
remove the majority of the heat. The divertor provides a secondary but significant source of heat
which must be removed. Components such as the cryostat, vacuum pumps, magnetic coils will also
require some component cooling.
For further information on the latest new design, the International Thermonuclear Experimental
Reactor (ITERITER) has issued “ITER Outline Design Report,” “ITER Outline Design Summary,”
and “Safety and Environment” (ITER). These documents provide generic descriptions of the cooling
systems.
Past Design Practices
Past design practice has been to provide defense in depth, redundancy of critical components or
systems and diversity. Some of these past practices may be applied to fusion machines. However,
the essential need for rigorous quality levels, impeccable safety standards and stringent regulations
will not be as applicable with the fusion machine. The needs of the fusion machine will be
investigated further before past design practices will be recommended for the fusion machine.
However, one may refer to International Thermonuclear Experimental Reactor (ITER)
documentation “ITER Outline Design Report,” “ITER Outline Design Summary,” and “Safety and
Environment” (ITER) for current information on current tokamak design practice.
ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS
The electrical power system includes off-site sources and on-site AC/DC sources.
The switchyard is the interface between the grid and the facility receiving power from the off-site
grid. Power is transformed from the grid voltage (usually 345 or 500 kV) to the voltages which will
be used in the facility. Fusion device power supplies may be very large (500 MW) and of relatively
71
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
high voltage (35-115 kV). The voltage supplied to the facility loads can be lower (13.8 kV) since
the load will be significantly less. The switchyard will also contain the various high voltage breakers
and disconnect switches.
Downstream from the switchyard, the electrical power distribution system is divided into two main
parts, namely the fusion facility distribution system and the plant distribution system.
The fusion facility distribution system is primarily a high voltage system (35-115 kV) designed to
supply the heavy (and often pulsed) loads for fusion facility operation. Included in this distribution
system are the magnet power supplies and various plasma fueling and heating power supplies. Also
included in this system will be the static volt-ampere-reactive (VAR) compensation and any energy
storage equipment required.
Section 68
The facility distribution system generally consists of four types (IV, III, II and I) of power to supply
those loads which are required to operate independently of the Fusion Facility Distribution System.
The four types of power supply are defined as follows:
Type IV (Non-Safety Class): Interruptible AC supply for those loads which can be interrupted
indefinitely without resulting in plant damage or safety hazards to either on-site personnel or the
public. Type IV power is supplied by the grid. This type of power supplies the normal facility
operating loads.
Type III (Safety Class): Interruptible alternating current (AC) supply for those loads which can
be interrupted briefly (5 minutes) without resulting in plant damage or safety hazards, but where
longer interruptions may cause such problems. Type III is supplied from Type IV (grid) power
when available, or by emergency (standby) generators. This type of power supplies loads which
are needed to achieve and maintain the fusion facility in a safe condition. In the event of loss of
grid power, the emergency generator power will fulfill the requirements.
Type II (Safety Class): Uninterruptible AC supply for those loads requiring a very secure
continuous power supply. This class of power is obtained by the use of inverters (or motor
generators) driven by Type I power.
Type I (Safety Class): Uninterruptible direct current (DC) supply for those loads requiring the
most continuity of supply. This type of power is supplied by batteries, which are continuously
recharged by Type III power through battery chargers fed from Type III MCCs. This class of
power supplies safety and protective (DC) loads which must be available at all times.
General Safety Design Guidance
Electrical system functions should be designated safety functions if they are credited in the facility
safety analysis in order to meet prescribed safety criteria. Systems or components needed to perform
safety functions should be designated safety-class systems or components. Components which do
not perform safety functions but whose failure causes the failure of a safety function should be
designated safety-class components.
72
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Fusion Facilities which require safety-class electrical systems should be supplied by two independent
off-site sources and one on-site source of electric power to ensure the supply of electric power to
each train of safety-class equipment
The electrical power system equipment that provides the power supply to safety-class systems and
components to perform fusion facility safety functions are classified as safety-class. Other electrical
systems should be non-safety-class (NSC). The safety-class electrical power system should be fed
from the safety bus.
The safety-class electrical equipment defined by the facility safety analysis should be designed in
accordance with the accepted design Standards given in this section. Where alternative methods are
used, justification should be provided in the facility authorization basis.
Equipment that is used for both safety and non-safety functions should be classified as part of the
safety systems. Isolation devices used to effect a safety system boundary should be classified as part
of the safety system.
No credible failure on the non-safety side of an isolation device should prevent any portion of a safety
system from meeting its minimum performance requirements during and following any design basis
accident requiring that safety function. A failure in an isolation device should be evaluated in the
same manner as a failure of other equipment in a safety system.
Section 69
Potential System Safety Functions
The potential safety functions for the back-up electrical systems are:
1. Normal Operation and Maintenance - Normal and backup power should be on-line or available
to supply safety functions. Specific potential safety functions are:
a) Provide for ability to survive or recover from off-normal events.
b) Monitor normal/back-up power
c) Monitor status of active components which must function during Design Basis Accidents
(DBA).
d) Monitor equipment required to isolate in the event of on-site or off-site system faults.
2. Design Basis Accidents - The safety analysis should specify design basis accidents and related
safety functions. The electrical power systems design provide power needed to enable the safety
functions. The following are potential design basis accidents for back-up electrical power
systems:
a) Internal Initiators:
1) Missile or pipe whip resulting from sudden failure of high energy systems. This accident
has potential for causing release of radioactive material and simultaneously disrupting
multiple electrical equipment.
73
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
2) Fire.
3) Human errors.
b) External Initiators:
1) Natural phenomena including earthquakes, hurricanes, tornadoes, floods, etc.
2) Aircraft and other missile impact.
3. Beyond Design Basis Accidents:
There are no system safety functions required for beyond design basis accidents.
Beyond design basis accidents include internal and external initiators whose frequency is lower
than the design basis frequency limit specified in the safety analysis.
Safety-Class Design Criteria and Standards
General Design Safety Features
Electric power from the transmission grid to the on-site electrical distribution system should be
supplied by two physically independent circuits designed and located so as to minimize, to the extent
practical, the likelihood of their simultaneous failure under operating and postulated accident and
environmental conditions.
If safe shutdown equipment is identified as a safety function, two completely independent sets of
shutdown equipment should be provided. Each of the two sets of equipment should be capable of
safely shutting down the fusion facility independently of the other set of equipment. Each set of
equipment is referred to as a train of safety-class equipment, and is identified as Train “A” and Train
“B.” Both trains “A” and “B” are completely redundant and independent of each other.
The on-site source of electrical power for each train is usually provided by safety-class diesel
generator set, one for Train “A” and one for Train “B,” completely independent of each other with
no inter-connections between the two. Alternate methods of comparable reliability are acceptable.
General Design Criteria/Standards
1. Safety-class design criteria for protection against fire, natural phenomena: Structures, systems,
and components of safety-class electrical systems/components should be designed to be capable of
withstanding the effects of natural phenomena such as earthquakes, tornadoes, hurricanes, and floods
as established in fusion facility safety analysis, without loss of capability to perform their safety
functions.
The design should minimize the possibility and the consequence of fire and its effects on the electrical
safety-class equipment and devices.
Section 70
The design should prescribe the use of fire resistant materials to the maximum practical extent
possible for all equipment to be used for the safety-class functions. The design should provide for
fire detection and suppression systems having appropriate capacity and capability to minimize adverse
74
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
effects of fires on safety-class systems, structures and components. Rupture or inadvertent operation
of fire suppression systems should not significantly impair the safety function of the electrical safety-
class systems, equipment, structures and components.
The design should also provide for protection of safety-class equipment and systems from potential
failure of non-safety-class hardware systems. Equipment, instruments and electrical systems, that
provide for the isolation should be capable of withstanding the effects of design basis natural
phenomena without failure of function and should be fail-safe in the event of power loss or failure
within electrical systems.
The design bases for these structures, systems, and components should reflect: (1) Appropriate
consideration of the most severe of the natural phenomena that have been historically reported for
the site and surrounding area, with sufficient margin for the limited accuracy, quantity, and period
of time in which the historical data have been accumulated, (2) appropriate combinations of the
effects of normal and accident conditions with the effects of the natural phenomena, and (3) the
importance of safety functions to be performed.
2. Safety-class design criteria for environmental and dynamic effects: Structures, systems, and
components of safety-class electrical systems/components should be designed to accommodate the
effects of, and be compatible with, the environmental conditions associated with the normal operation,
maintenance, testing, and postulated accidents (including loss of coolant accident, loss of flow
accident, loss of vacuum accident, plasma transients, magnet transients, loss of cryogen, tritium plant
events, and auxiliary system accidents).
Also, structures, systems, and components of safety-class should be designed appropriately to protect
against dynamic effects, including the effects of missiles, pipe whipping, and environmental conditions
associated with normal operation and the above postulated accidents.
3. Safety-class design criteria for sharing of structures, systems, and components: Structures,
systems, and components of safety-class electrical systems/components of the fusion facility should
not be shared among other facilities unless it can be shown that such sharing will not significantly
impair their ability to perform their safety functions.
4. Safety-class design criteria for inspection and testing of electric power systems: The design
should provide for periodic testing of safety-class electrical items to prevent equipment failure. The
tests and inspections should assess the parameters related to their safety functions. The testability
of safety-class on-site AC and DC power systems should be designed to meet the following guidelines
or equivalent.
AC systems and components: IEEE 308 and 338 Standards.
DC systems and components: IEEE 308 and 387 Standards.
5. Design criteria for electrical penetration assemblies (Safety-Class and Non-Safety Class) of Fusion
Facility containment: Containment electrical penetrations should be designed to be capable of
withstanding, without loss of mechanical integrity, the maximum possible fault current versus time
condition that could occur given a single random failure of circuit overload protective devices located
in circuits of the on-site safety-class AC/DC power systems. IEEE 317 Standard., Electrical
Section 71
75
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Penetration Assemblies in Containment Structures for Nuclear Stations (see also Regulatory Guide
1.63), should be used as a design guide.
Penetrations should be designed to meet the same requirements of robustness and leak tightness as
the penetrated containment or confinement (shield) system. The safety analysis should determine the
safety-class of each electrical confinement penetration.
6. Safety-class design criteria for electric power systems: Safety-class power supplies, including
batteries, emergency power supply from diesel generator(s), and the on-site electric distribution
system, should have sufficient independence, redundancy, and testability to perform their safety
functions assuming a single failure.
Acceptance is based on meeting, either wholly or in part as necessary, the following specific safety
design criteria:
IEEE 308 Std., Criteria for Class 1E Power Systems for Nuclear Power Generating Stations
(see also Regulatory Guide 1.6)
IEEE 323 Std., Qualifying Class 1E Equipment for Nuclear Power Generating Stations
IEEE 336 Std., Standard Installation, Inspection and Testing Requirements for Power,
Instrumentation, and Control Equipment at Nuclear
IEEE 338 Std., Standard Criteria for the Periodic Surveillance Testing of Nuclear Power
Generating Station Safety Systems (see also Regulatory Guide 1.118)
IEEE 344 Std., Recommended Practice for Seismic Qualification of Class 1E Equipment for
Nuclear Power Generating
IEEE 352 Std., Guide for General Principles of Reliability Analysis of Nuclear Power
Generating Station Safety Systems
IEEE 379 Std., Standard Application of the Single-Failure Criterion to Nuclear Power
Generating Safety Systems (see also Regulatory Guide 1.53)
IEEE 382 Std., Standard for Qualification of Actuators for Power-Operated Valve Assemblies
with Safety-Related Functions for Nuclear Power (see also Regulatory Guide 1.73)
IEEE 383 Std., Standard for Type Test of Class 1E Electric Cables, Field Splices, and
Connections for Nuclear Power Generating Stations
IEEE 384 Std., Standard Criteria for Independence of Class 1E Equipment and Circuits (see
also Regulatory Guide 1.75)
IEEE 387 Std., Standard Criteria for Diesel-Generator Units Applied as Standby Power
Supplies for Nuclear Power Generating Stations (see also Regulatory Guide 1.9)
IEEE 450 Std., Recommended Practice for Maintenance, Testing, and Replacement of Vented
Lead-Acid Batteries for Stationary (see also Regulatory Guide 1.129)
76
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
IEEE 577 Std., Standard Requirements for Reliability Analysis in the Design and Operation of
Safety Systems for Nuclear Power Generating Stations
IEEE 603 Std., Standard Criteria for Safety Systems for Nuclear Power Generating Stations
Radiation/Contamination and Equipment Life
Provisions should be made to avoid installation of safety-class electrical equipment, systems, and
components in areas of high radiation/contamination levels to prelude exposure that could degrade
the elements quality.
The electrical emergency/back-up power system, equipment and components should be qualified for
the life time radiation environment. The equipment structural design and qualification analysis should
use conservative end of life parameters. If a component expected lifetime is less than the facility
design life, the design should provide for component replacements.
Control and Instrumentation
Section 72
The emergency/back-up power systems should be provided with instrumentation and control elements
and components to monitor the necessary parameters to perform their safety functions for normal
operation and for cases of emergency (Design Basis Accidents). The safety analysis should identify
and the design should implement:
1. Instrumentation to monitor the safety-class parameters.
2. Controls to maintain the measured parameters within the operational limits.
The design of safety-class systems should include sufficient redundancy and diversity to ensure that
single failure will not result in total loss of instrumentation or controls for required safety function.
Design Considerations
General
The preferred supply voltages are 13,800V, 3-phase, 60-Hz for all motors rated 3000-hp and above;
4,160V, 3-phase, 60-Hz, for all motors rated 251 to 2500-hp; and 480V, 3-phase, 60-Hz for all
motors 1 to 250-hp. Motors rated 3/4-hp and less may operate at 120V, single phase, 60-Hz, except
critical equipment and motor-operated valves (MOVs) that will be operated at a supply voltage of
480V, 3-phase, 60-Hz.
Electrical equipment and systems essential to safety functions defined in the safety analysis should be
identified as Safety Class, should conform to IEEE standards and guides for Class 1E electrical
systems and components.
Safety-class Diesel Generators and/or Combustion Turbine Generators
One non-safety-class and two safety-class diesel generators or combustion turbine-generators should
be provided for the fusion facility.
77
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
The safety-class diesel generators (or combustion turbine generators) should be designed in
accordance with the requirements of USNRC Regulatory Guide 1.9 and should meet the requirements
of IEEE-387 Standard. The capacity of diesel generators (or combustion turbine generators) should
be sufficient to accommodate all safety-class loads as defined in fusion facility safety analysis.
There should be no direct interconnections between the emergency/back-up electrical power sources
of the facility. There should be no provisions for automatically paralleling these power sources within
the facility, and administrative control should be provided to prevent manual paralleling of these
power sources. Provisions should be made for auto/manual synchronizing each emergency/back-up
power source, to its respective bus for periodic testing during normal facility operation.
Each emergency/back-up power source and its auxiliaries should be located in seismically qualified
separate rooms.
After start initiation, the power source, diesel or combustion turbine generator, should accelerate to
and stabilize at synchronous speed with rated frequency/voltage within the time period specified in
the safety analysis, and accept the first block of loads.
The safety-class diesel generators should be manufactured and tested in accordance with ANSI
Standards C50.10 and C50.12, NEMA Standard Publication MG-1, and IEEE Standards 115 and
386.
If an alternative type of power source is chosen, e.g. a dam and hydroelectric turbine, it should be
manufactured and tested according to the requirements of procurement specifications.
Switchgear and Load Centers
The switchgear should be fully rated for the maximum expected short-circuit current and continuous
current capacity. All switchgear breakers should be drawout type, electrically operated, stored energy
air circuit breakers.
Section 73
The electrical equipment with 480 V or higher for the safety-class systems should be designed and
qualified in accordance with IEEE Standards 344 and 323 for Class 1E electrical equipment.
Fault calculations should be made in accordance with the latest issue of ANSI Standards C37.010 and
C37.13.
Selected high voltage switchgear breakers including 480V should be provided with local control in
addition to the remote control in the control room and the automatic controls. The control voltage
should be 125 VDC.
All switchgear and load centers should be located indoors. Access space should be provided in back
and in front of the switchgear and load centers as recommended by the manufacturer.
Large 480V loads (60 through 250-hp motor loads, 100 through 400-kW non-motor loads) and
motor control centers should be supplied from 480V load centers. Each load center should be
provided with 4160 to 480V, 3-phase, 60 Hz, dry type transformer, with a 60 kV Basic Impulse Level
(BIL) primary rating. “De-energized change” taps should be provided the same as specified for the
78
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
facility auxiliary transformers. The 480V secondary winding of the transformer should be
wye-connected with the neutral solidly grounded, except where the loads are the pressurizer heaters,
in which case the secondary should be delta connected. The transformer primary should be fed from
the 4160 V switchgear by cable. The transformers and the switchgear buses should have sufficient
capacity and should be connected so that overloading under any condition of operation is prevented.
A separate ground fault relay should be provided for the transformer neutral and each load center
feeder.
Motor Control Centers
AC Motor Control Centers:
The 480 V MCCs should be metal enclosed, NEMA Class II, Type B. All 480 VAC motor control
center motor starter circuits should be full-voltage non-reversing and full-voltage reversing,
combination type with breakers, contactors, and individual control transformers. Transformers
supplying the control power should be of uniform rating for similar units and will be sized to provide
for the addition of relays and other loads. The minimum size should be 150 V-amperes. Starter sizes
should be based on motor hp, voltage, and type of service. Table II-3 below covers low-voltage (600
V and below) NEMA Class A (for induction motors) general purpose starters.
Table II-3. Load voltages for general-purpose starters
Size of Starter (480 volts, 3-phase) Type of Load
0 Heater
1 0 - 10 hp motor
2 15 - 25 hp motor
3 30 - 50 hp motor
All MCCs should be designed to contain approximately 20% spare circuit breakers, motor starters,
and/or spaces. Essential circuits should be designed to provide for the maximum possible continuity
of unit operation so that after a brief loss of power or voltage dip, the starter will return to its original
position after the power is restored.
DC Motor Control Centers:
The DC MCCs will be similar to the 480 VAC MCCs except that starters will be reduced-voltage
type to limit the motor starting inrush current to 200% of rated current. Some loads will be
controlled locally at the equipment in addition to automatic remote control from the control room.
79
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Direct Current Systems
The facility direct current power for safety-class systems should be provided by several independent
DC systems as required for normal and abnormal plant operations. Each safety-class DC system will
consist of one independent 125 VDC battery, battery charger, and a DC control center. DC motor
control centers will be provided where required for motor-operated valves and pump motors as
indicated above.
Section 74
Each DC subsystem will be of adequate size to provide control and switching power to safety-class
systems and components. The DC power systems should be designed so that no single failure will
result in conditions that prevent safe shutdown of the fusion facility. Redundant safety-class loads
will be distributed between the redundant DC subsystems.
The DC systems will operate ungrounded. A DC ground detector relay for each system will be
provided to annunciate an undervoltage condition.
All batteries will have sufficient capacity to supply power to the DC systems for the time period
specified in the safety analysis without the support of the charger.
The capacity of each battery charger will be based on the largest combined demands of the various
steady-state loads and the charging capacity required to restore the battery from the design minimum
charge state to the fully charged state within 12 hours under any facility operating condition.
Calculations for battery sizing will be in accordance with the method presented in IEEE-485. The
Class 1E system design should be in conformance with IEEE 308.
Vital Instrumentation and Control Power Supply
Independent ungrounded vital instrumentation and control power supplies should be provided to
supply emergency/back-up power to instruments and controls systems credited in the safety analysis
report. Each vital AC power supply will consist of an inverter, distribution panel, and manual transfer
switch. Normally, the distribution panel will be supplied by the inverter. Each inverter will be
supplied by a 480 VAC safety-class power source and a separate safety-class 125 VDC subsystem.
A backup supply will be provided to each vital AC bus from a safety-class AC regulating type
transformer through a manual transfer switch. The capacity of each regulating transformer should
be adequate to meet the largest demand of any of the two vital AC distribution panels to which each
regulating transformer may be connected.
Motors
All motors for safety-class equipment should be rated, manufactured, and tested in accordance with
NEMA Standard MG-1 and other applicable USA and ISC standards.
All motors should be sized to ensure operation within the temperature limits given in NEMA
Standard MG-1. All DC motors should be rated at 120 and 240 volts. The voltage rating of the AC
motors, in general, should be as in Table II-4 following:
80
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Table II-4. Voltage ratings for AC motors
1. All motors for motor-operated valves and
Class 1E damper motors
480 volts, three-phase, 60 Hz
2. Motors 1/3 hp and below, except as
specified in item 1 (above)
115 volts, single-phase, 60 Hz
3. Motors from 1/2 hp through 250 hp 480 volts, three-phase, 60 Hz
4. Motors from 251 hp through 2500 hp 4,160 volts, three-phase, 60 Hz
5. Motors 3000 hp and above 13,800 volts, three phase, 60 Hz
All AC motors should be suitable for across-the-line starting. Non-safety-class motors should be
designed to accelerate the connected load with a minimum of 80% rated voltage at the motor
terminals. Safety-class motors should be designed to accelerate the connected load with a minimum
of 75% rated voltage. Wherever possible, DC motor starting current should be limited to 200% of
rated current. The full-voltage starting current of AC induction motors rated 250 hp or more should
not exceed 6.5 times the full-load current.
In general, motors 60 hp through 250 hp will be fed from load centers. Motors 50 hp and below, and
MOVs, will be fed from MCCs.
Section 75
All safety-class motors should have non-hygroscopic Class F or Class H insulation with Class B
temperature rise. All non-safety-class motors should have at least Class B insulation sealed against
moisture and contaminants.
Enclosed motor windings should have moisture resistant Class B insulation systems, suitable for
power plant service, conforming to the requirements of NEMA Standard MG-1.
Class F or H insulation may be used if the temperature rise does not exceed limits for Class B
insulation.
All motors 3 hp and above located outdoors, and motors 25 hp or larger located indoors, should have
space heaters. Open, drip-proof motors 3 hp and larger in damp, indoor locations should have space
heaters. Wherever possible, space heaters should be rated for 220-240 volts, but are to be connected
to a 120 volt single-phase service.
All motors installed indoors should be open, drip-proof, and fully guarded or should be totally
enclosed, and fan cooled. Motors installed outdoors should be NEMA weather protected Type I or
should be totally enclosed and fan cooled.
Stator resistance temperature detectors (RTDs) should be provided for all medium voltage motors.
Rotor temperature monitoring should be provided on all motors above 1000 hp.
81
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Power, Control, and Instrumentation Cables
Except in the case of thermocouple and lighting cables, all conductors should be Class B stranded,
tin-coated or lead-alloy-coated, soft or annealed copper. The following classes of cables should be
provided:
15 kV and 5 kV power cable
600 volt power cable
Lighting wire rated 600 volts
Control cable rated 600 volts
Instrument cables and special cables
Communication cables
All cables should be capable of passing the cable tray vertical flame test set forth in IEEE-383.
Individual conductor in cables should be capable of passing the vertical flame test of subsection 6.19.6
of IPCEA S-19-81 and/or S-66-524.
Safety-class cables which must survive exposure to abnormal environmental conditions such as those
following postulated design basis accidents should be qualified for such service per IEEE-383.
The medium-voltage power cables for the 13.8 kV system should be rated at 15 kV, and the cables
for the 4.16 kV system should be rated at 5 kV. The conductors should be insulated with an ethylene
propylene rubber (EPR) or equivalent compound rated for 90o C conductor temperature. The 13.8
kV cables should be single-conductor (1/C) shielded with hypalon or equivalent jacket. The 4160
V cables in trays should be either 1/C or 3/C cables with a hypalon or equivalent jacket. The 4160
V cables in conduit and in underground ducts should be 1/C, shielded cables with a hypalon or
equivalent jacket.
Power cable for use at voltages of 480 V and less should be rated at 600 V. Each conductor should
be insulated with an ethylene propylene rubber (EPR) or equivalent compound rated for 90o C
conductor temperature. Multiple conductor cables should be used for all wire sizes up through No.
2 American Wire Gage (AWG) and should be provided with an overall jacket of neoprene, hypalon,
or equivalent material. Single conductor cables should only be used for sizes No. 1/O AWG and
larger, except in special cases where a calculation is made to verify the acceptability of and need for
single conductor power cables No. 2 AWG or smaller. Insulation and jacket thicknesses should be
in accordance with Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA) standards.
Section 76
Control cables should be rated at 600 V. Each conductor should be insulated with cross-linked
polyethylene, Tefzel, ethylene propylene rubber, or equivalent compound rated for 90o C conductor
temperature. Multiple conductor cables should be used for all control circuits; they should be
provided with an overall jacket of neoprene, hypalon, or an equivalent material. Insulation and jacket
thicknesses should be in accordance with IPCEA standards. Conductor size for control cables should
be at least No. 16 AWG. Control cables between switchyard and plant area should be of the shielded
type.
82
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Instrumentation cables should be multi-conductor, No. 16 AWG, twisted and shielded, and should
have 600 V insulation. Shield grounding should be in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's
recommendation. Multi-paired cables should be used wherever possible between terminal boxes and
the cabinets. The insulation and jacket material should be the same as specified for the control cable.
All thermocouple circuits should be No. 18 AWG or 20 AWG with twisted and shielded leads.
Multi-paired cables should be used wherever practicable.
Coaxial and triaxial cables should conform to the specifications of the suppliers of the systems in
which they are used.
All individual load circuit conducts should be capable of carrying 125% of rated full load at ambient
temperature with due allowance for cable grouping. Transformer primary and secondary feeder
cables should be capable of continuously carrying 115% of the maximum transformer rating. Cable
size should meet the requirements of short circuit duty, and limit the voltage drop to 5% (2% in
supply feeder cable plus 3% in branch circuit feeder equals 5% overall voltage drop).
Cable current carrying capacity (ampacity) information contained in IPCEA Publications P-46-426
and P-54-440 should be used to select cable size. For circuits which will be routed partly through
conduit and partly through trays or underground ducts, the cable size should be based on the
ampacity in the portion of the circuit with the highest conductor temperature.
The conductor size should be large enough to ensure that the conductor temperature, after a short
circuit, (assuming rated conductor temperature prior to the short circuit) will not exceed 2500 C.
For purpose of sizing the cable, it should be assumed that over load operation at the emergency
temperature of the conductor will be limited to 100 hours per year, and that such 100-hour overload
periods will not occur more than five times during the life of the facility. The emergency temperature
rating is 130o C for cross linked polyethylene and EPR insulated cable.
Raceways and Trays
Underground, exposed, and embedded conduits should be used through the facility where the use of
trays is not economical or practicable.
Underground conduits for other than safety-class circuits should be type PVC ducts encased in a
concrete duct bank. Underground safety-class circuits should be run in cable trenches, tunnels, or
duct banks designed to withstand the SSE. The minimum size of conduit used in duct bank should
be 2 inches.
Section 77
The top of duct banks should be buried a minimum of 2 feet below grade. Underground conduit
within duct bank for non-Category I (non-seismic) installation should be non-metallic type DB. The
duct encasement should be reinforced concrete. The surrounding encasement should be a minimum
of 3 inches thick. PVC type DB encased in reinforced concrete should be used for a Seismic
Category I duct bank. Rigid steel conduit encased in reinforced concrete should be used for isolated
runs. Single conduit leaving a duct bank between manholes or groups of conduits should be rigid
steel galvanized encased in un-reinforced concrete with 3 inch cover all around. The top surface of
the electrical duct banks should be covered with red dye on the surface to distinguish them from other
underground structures.
83
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
All safety-class circuits inside the facility should be run in trays or in rigid steel conduit for all sizes.
Safety-class circuits should be routed only through safety-class raceways. All non-safety-class
circuits originating in safety-class equipment (associated circuits) including space heater circuits
should be routed in the same manner as safety-class circuits up to the isolation device. No other
circuits should be routed through safety-class raceways.
Trough-type cable trays should be utilized where practicable. Tray strength should be verified by
tests in accordance with the latest revisions of NEMA VE 1-1991 Metal Cable Tray Systems. The
fill of power trays should be limited to 30% of usable area of 3 inch deep tray. The fill of control
trays and instrumentation trays should be limited to 30% area. The loading of each section of tray
should be calculated based upon the cable manufacturer's data.
Separate power trays and control trays should be provided in the vicinity of motor control centers
and 480 V switchgear. In outlying areas, control cable and 600 V power cables may be run in the
same tray. Lighting branch circuits should not be run in trays in any location, except for lighting
panel feeders which will be 90o C cable.
Trays for cables of different voltage levels should be stacked in descending order with the higher
voltage. Instrumentation trays should always be at the bottom. At least 12 inches of clear space
should be provided between tray levels.
Trays should be made of hot-dipped galvanized steel. Adequate tray support must be provided to
bear the electromagnetic loading in cables and trays when trays are used in areas of strong magnetic
field gradients and time varying fields.
Instrumentation cables should not share the same raceway with power cables, control cables, or
telephone cables.
Cable tray systems related to safety-class electrical systems should be designed the requirements of
IEEE-344.
Separate conduit should be supplied for the DC battery feeders.
Cable trays should be designed for a dead cable load of fifty pounds per foot, plus a single live load
of 200 pounds applied at any point along the tray between supports. In addition, tray supports should
be designed for loads due to the interaction between DC currents and the local magnetic field. In
general, the medium voltage cable trays will be sized to allow spacing between cables of more than
one cable diameter in a single layer. Fire stops of fire retardant materials will be used at floor and
wall penetrations and long vertical runs. Normally, trays will not be routed over areas of high fire
hazard; e. g., main lubricating oil reservoir, diesel generator sets, etc.
Section 78
Cable tray systems related to safety-class electrical systems should be designed to the requirements
of IEEE-344.
Electrical Penetrations
Electrical penetration assemblies should be provided as a means of passing electrical circuits through
the containment building wall while maintaining the integrity of the containment pressure barrier. The
84
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
assemblies should meet the requirements set forth in IEEE-317. The assemblies should be inserted
in and bolted to feed-through sleeves welded to the steel liner of the wall of the containment building
and have a double electrical conductor seal. A seal should be provided at the bolted connection to
the feed-through sleeve.
At least four separate electrical penetration areas should be provided to maintain the physical
separation specified in USNRC Regulatory Guide 1.75. Where Safety-class redundant protection
system sensors are located within the containment building, each circuit should be brought to a
penetration area with separation maintained among the redundant circuits.
The electrical penetration assemblies should conform to USNRC Regulator Guide 1.63.
Three basic types of electrical penetrations should be provided:
Type I Medium voltage power, 15 kV or 5.0 kV
Type II Power and control, 600 volts and below
Type III Instrumentation, thermocouple, coaxial, triaxial, and other special circuits
Circuit loading should be limited, based upon the manufacturer's recommendations, to ensure that the
temperature will not cause excessive drying of the concrete adjacent to the penetration assemblies.
Provisions should be made for periodic leak testing of the electrical penetration assemblies.
Separation of Facility Safety Systems/Components
Physical separation and independence of electrical systems should be established in accordance with
IEEE-384, Standard Criteria for Independence of Class 1E Equipment and Circuits, and USNRC
Regulatory Guide 1.75 to ensure meeting the requirements of IEEE-308 and 603.
Separation requirements should be applied to the following electrical systems when these systems
serve safety functions:
Cable tray and conduit system
Circuit wiring
Diesel generator or alternate emergency/back-up power system
Medium and low voltage switchgear
Motor control centers
DC batteries, chargers, and distribution system
Electrical penetrations
85
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Physical separation and independence should be provided for the four fusion device protection system
channels, identified as Channels 1, 2, 3, and 4, and for two load groups of safety related equipment,
identified as Trains A and B.
Redundant Channel Separation:
Raceways for the four redundant protection channels, engineered safety feature (ESF) actuation
signals, and the two safety related trains should be physically separated from each other. However,
Channel 1 and an ESF actuation signal channel may be run in the same raceway stack without
separation as Train A; also Channel 2 and an ESF actuation signal channel may be run in the same
raceway stack as Train B without separation. Channels 3 and 4 should conform to the separation
requirements as required. Separation should be maintained or a barrier should be used to the
terminating devices.
Non-redundant Separation:
Circuits for non-redundant balance of plant (BOP) functions originating at safety-class equipment
should be provided with isolation devices or may be run in raceways used by associated safety-class
circuits; however, the routing of such non-redundant circuits will be controlled the same as the safety-
class circuits.
Section 79
Cable Tray Separation:
In general, physical separation of cable trays for redundant safety-class circuits should be maintained
by a minimum of three feet horizontal separation. Vertical stacking of redundant cable trays should
be avoided, if at all possible, but where such arrangement is employed, minimum vertical spacing
should be five feet between the two groups. Where this is not practicable, barriers will be provided
or rigid steel conduit and thermal barriers should be used. Divided cable trays should not be used to
separate redundant systems.
The cable tray system should be designed and installed according to the requirements of IEEE-384.
(see also Regulatory Guide 1.75).
Cable Color Coding
Cables for redundant systems should be color coded. Cable trays and conduits carrying these cables
should be identified by the same color marking or colored labels at intervals, when passing through
a barrier, or wherever confusion may exist. Acceptable color coding of the cables is as follows:
Safety Class:
Train A Red
Train B Green
Channel 1 Red
86
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Channel 2 Green
Channel 3 Yellow
Channel 4 Blue
Non-safety class: Black
Reliability Design Features
To meet the expected stringent reliability requirements and to keep partial power system failures from
having a cascading failure effect, the system should be designed with the following features.
1. The design assumes that three sets of lines (circuits) should connect the facility to the switchyard
(grid); two for fusion facility operation and one for main (power) generator output. To maximize
the separation of pulsed (tokamak) and plant loads, it is assumed that one set of circuits will
supply the tokamak loads while the second will supply the plant loads during fusion facility
operation. In the event of loss of one circuit, the fusion facility load would be shed (plasma
shutdown) and the remaining set of circuits would supply the plant loads. During the fusion
power generation (if designed), the third set of circuits will be used.
2. Since each safety bus has double supply paths, any single failure can be limited to a single bus.
This provides redundant backup capability with a high degree of independence.
3. Each type of power is subdivided into two, three, or four segments with limited cross ties to
provide redundancy without excessive cross-links.
4. The distribution system should have automatic fast transfer logic systems which sense the loss of
supply to a bus, determine what alternative supplies are available, and carry out switching to
connect the affected bus to a viable power supply.
5. Physical separation of redundant buses will be provided for protection against common causes
of failure (e.g. fires, or in-plant flooding).
6. Four 125 VDC buses are proposed to provide four independent channels of safety-class system
instrumentation to permit the use of single failure resistant, 2 out of 3, 2 out of 4, or 3 out of 4
channel voting logic on Fusion Facility Protection Systems.
7. The use of two emergency (standby) generators for Safety Train A and B is proposed, each with
the sufficient capability of providing power for the emergency loads needed to safely shut down
the fusion facility.
8. Suitable test capability will be required to allow periodic testing of all safety-class systems and
automatic transfer systems as well as periodic operation of all circuit breakers and disconnects
without adversely affecting system operation or compromising safety. Depending on the
reliability requirements, such testing may have to be on-line.
Section 80
87
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Independent Design Review
The primary objective in the independent design review of the Emergency/Back-up power system is
to determine that these systems satisfy the acceptance criteria and will perform their design functions
during fusion facility normal operation, anticipated operational occurrences, and accident conditions.
In the independent design review, the descriptive information, including the design bases and their
relation to the acceptance criteria, preliminary analyses, electrical single line diagrams, functional logic
diagrams, preliminary functional piping and instrumentation diagrams (P&ID), and preliminary
physical arrangement drawings are scrutinized to determine that there is reasonable assurance that
the final design will meet the these objectives.
Electrical Power Systems
Combustion turbine-generators
Recently, the combustion turbine-generator has been used as an emergency power source in the
power plants and the other heavy industries due to it's high reliability, availability, and maintainability.
Therefore, design should perform an application study for the use of combustion turbine as an
emergency power source in the fusion facility. (see ASME 91 and West 211)
Grounding
A facility grounding grid consisting of bare copper cables buried beneath grade will be furnished to
limit step and touch potentials to safe values under all fault conditions. Bare copper risers should be
furnished for all electrical underground ducts and equipment, and for connections to the grounding
systems within buildings. The design analysis will be based on the procedures and recommendations
of IEEE-80.
Grounding within buildings should be in accordance with the NFPA 70. Grounding systems
connected to the station ground grid should be provided in each building with connections made to
metallic tanks, equipment, cable trays, and exposed metal structures. Every other perimeter steel
column should be connected directly to the ground grid. Each major piece of equipment or tanks
should have two ground connections diagonally to each other.
System and Equipment Grounding
System and equipment grounding should be in accordance with IEEE-142.
One No. 4/0 AWG bare copper cable should be installed with each underground electrical duct run.
It should be connected with the ground cables from other duct runs at each manhole. All hardware
in each manhole should be bonded to these ground cables.
All metallic structures, towers, poles, and like items should be connected to the ground grid.
All switchgear, motor control centers, and control cabinets should be furnished with horizontal
ground bus. The ground bus in switchgear and MCC's should be connected to the grounding system
with one No. 4/0 AWG copper ground cable at each end tied to the building steel or a ground pad
set in the floor. The ground bus in control cabinets should be connected to the grounding system
88
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
with No. 2/0 AWG Stranded copper cable at each end tied to the building steel or a ground pad set
in the floor. An insulated grounding grid should be installed in the control room and computer room
for grounding the computer and any other panel that needs grounding connected to the facility
grounding system.
Cathodic Protection
A recommendation for cathodic protection should be made based on the results of soils analysis and
resistivity readings.
Section 81
Consideration should be given for protection of such facility structures as underground pipes and
storage tanks, surface mounted storage tank bottoms, sheet piling, and concrete encased steel for the
fusion facility containment or confinement building.
Lightning Protection
A lightning protection system should be provided for all major structures. Design and installation of
the system should be in accordance with the NFPA-780.
Lightning protection should be provided for all buildings that need to be protected. The system
should be connected to the station ground grid and to supplementary ground rods if required.
Station type lightning arresters will be provided on each phase of the incoming transmission lines to
the main step-up and the start-up transformers. The arresters will be either mounted on each
transformer, or separately supported and located near each transformer with connections to the high
voltage bushings. The voltage rating of the lightning arresters should be compatible with the ratings
of other surge protective equipment connected to the system.
Fire Detection and Fire Protection
The fire protection system should be designed in accordance with the requirements of National Fire
Protection Association and the applicable local codes and regulations. Equipment and facilities for
fire protection will be provided to protect facility equipment, structures and personnel from fire and
the resultant release of toxic vapors. If there is a possibility of an explosion, the designer should
consider the use of an explosion suppression system (NPFA 69).
Smoke, ionization, and fire detectors should be provided in enclosed areas where electrical
switchgear, motor control centers, control cabinets, etc., are located. Detectors should also be
provided in areas of heavy concentration of cable trays, in ventilation ducts, penetration rooms, the
diesel generator rooms, and selected areas of the containment or confinement. Smoke and fire
detection alarms will be annunciated in the control room and at the fire department or fire brigade.
Fire-walls, barriers and physical separation of redundant safety features electrical equipment should
be provided as required. Vertical cable tray runs will have horizontal fire barriers where required.
Where cable trays pass through openings in walls or floors, fire stops should be provided.
Any smoke from fires should be controlled so that heat and toxic combustion products are kept from
the control room and computer control areas. Smoke movement and control should be accomplished
89
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
with ventilation dampers activated by smoke detectors in ducts. Designers should consider using
smoke hatches in building roofs. NFPA 92A and NFPA 204M give smoke control design guidance.
REMOTE MAINTENANCE SYSTEMS
The remote handling systems include robotic, telerobotic, teleoperated, and crane systems for
servicing the areas of a fusion facility with either high potential personnel hazards or where other
methods are not practical. The latter includes combinations of high accuracy, large capacity, and
limited space unique to the fusion facility that will have to be addressed.
Remote handling systems should be provided to minimize personnel exposure to radiation and other
hazards during the operation and maintenance. Remote handling systems should be considered where
it is anticipated that personnel exposures would otherwise approach dose guideline limits or where
contaminated puncture wounds could occur.
Section 82
The following sections give generalized requirements for remote handling systems derived from the
unique characteristics of the fusion facility. These should be viewed as additions to the requirements
of more traditional robotic systems.
System Definitions
Robot - An automatic, position-controlled, reprogammable, multi-functional manipulator having
several axis, capable of handling materials, parts, tools, or specialized devices through variable
programmed operations for the performance of a variety of tasks.
Telerobot - A robot that is directed through a series of preprogrammed functions or steps by an
operator, in menu driven, teach and play, or simulator functional steps.
Teleoperator - A robot that is under the immediate control of an operator, to perform a series of
robotic motions or functions within workcell constraints, including collision avoidance and automatic
alignment.
Crane systems - A conventional crane of specialized nature or “smart” crane, such as a “swing free”
crane.
General Safety Design Guidance
Remote handling systems should be provided to minimize personnel radiation exposure during the
operation and maintenance of the fusion device. ALARA concepts should be applied to minimize
exposures where cost effective. Remote handling systems should be considered where it is anticipated
that personnel exposures would otherwise approach dose guideline limits or where contaminated
puncture wounds could occur.
Systems or components needed to perform safety functions should be designated as safety-class
systems or components. Components which do not perform safety functions but whose single failure
causes the failure of a safety function should be designated safety-significant components.
90
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Potential System Safety Functions
Normal Operations
Safety-significant remote handling systems and components should not cause a Safety System to fail
under normal plant operating conditions. Potential safety functions during normal operation include:
1. Erect portable radiation shielding panels
2. Place or relocate experimental devices in high radiation fields
3. Test or inspect SSCs as necessary to assure performance of safety functions
Maintenance
Remote handling systems and components should not cause a collision with safety systems or
components while performing normal or abnormal plant maintenance. System design and operational
controls should limit operator radiation exposure. Potential safety functions during maintenance
include:
1. Erect portable radiation shielding panels
2. Replace equipment or components in high radiation fields or transport equipment or components
to a hot-cell.
3. Decontaminate SSCs in preparation for maintenance
Design Basis Accidents
Remote handling equipment classified as safety-class should be designed to function both during and
after a design basis event. Safety-significant remote handling systems and components should not
drop their loads, collide with structures or releasing gas or aerosols under basis accident conditions.
Safety-significant remote handling systems and components should also not cause safety systems or
components to fail under design basis accident conditions. Potential safety functions during design
basis accidents include:
1. Install/place diagnostic instruments
2. Install consequence mitigation devices in high radiation fields or otherwise unsafe conditions.
Beyond Design Basis Accidents
Section 83
There are no system safety functions required for beyond design basis accidents. Beyond design basis
accidents include internal and external initiators whose frequency is lower than the design basis
frequency specified in the safety analysis.
91
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Structural
General
Remote handling systems and components encompass all components up to the primary plant support
structures. The design allowables for safety-class or safety-significant remote handling systems and
components should be in accordance with codes identified in Table 2 of this volume.
Normal Loads
Remote handling systems should withstand the static, dynamic, thermal, and normal plant loads,
without exceeding applicable code allowable stresses.
Natural Phenomena and Accident Loads
Safety-class remote handling systems should be designed to withstand effects of natural phenomena
and design basis accidents. Loads from natural phenomena and accidents should not cause safety-
significant remote handling systems and components to fail in such a manner as to cause failure of
safety-class components or systems.
Materials
Materials of construction should be qualified for the life time service with the anticipated thermal and
radiation environment. The structural design analyses should use conservative end of life properties.
If a component's expected life time is less than the fusion facility life time, design should provide for
component replacement. Additionally, the minimization of material activation and the ability to
decontaminate materials should be considered. The nature of a fusion facility is such that very high
levels of radiation, temperature, magnetic flux, and neutron flux are expected. Additionally, the
presence of hydrogen, deuterium, and tritium gases is anticipated during off normal events.
The effects of galvanic or chemical corrosion should be evaluated as part of the material selection
process.
Materials used in the fabrication of remote handling equipment load bearing members should conform
to standards defining chemical and mechanical properties specified by the designer. Allowable
stresses in remote handling equipment structural steel members during normal operation should not
exceed those codes identified in Table 2, and allowable design stresses in mechanical components
should provide a factor of safety of 5 when under rated load. Brittle fracture and fatigue during all
operation and testing conditions should be design considerations.
Joint and weld details should be designed to prevent fracture, lamellar tearing, low-cycle fatigue and
embrittlement.
Lubricants, sealants and protective coatings should be compatible with their intended service and
environment.
In the selection of materials, including lubricants, sealants and electrical insulation for equipment to
be stored or used in the primary confinement, design life radiation exposure (during normal operation
92
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
and, where applicable, accident conditions) should be considered and materials selected so there will
be no loss in function for the design life of the equipment.
The surface finish of all external materials should allow for ease of radiological decontamination.
Highly polished, non oxidizing, and non painted surfaces should be used so as to not entrap
radiological material or produce mobile dust.
The potential for hydrogen embrittlement and weakening of structural members should be considered
in all locations where exposure to hydrogen, deuterium, or tritium is anticipated.
Section 84
The radiological activation of materials in areas of high gamma and neutron fluxes should be
considered in the choice of materials. This includes metals, greases, fluids, and elastomers.
Instrumentation and Controls
The following instrumentation and control features should be provided in the design of the remote
handling equipment as necessary to prevent damage to the handling equipment, to nearby safety-class
or safety-related SSCs, and to the handled components; to provide for personnel safety; and to
remotely recover equipment (to prevent the necessity of personnel recovery of equipment):
1. Underload - An interlock actuated upon a reduction in load, while lowering with grapple
attached, at other than full down position, to prevent any further downward travel.
2. Overload - An interlock actuated upon an unacceptable increase in hoisting force to prevent
upward travel.
3. Up-Position - An interlock set at a predetermined operational limit to prevent any further upward
travel.
4. Down-Position - An interlock set at the predetermined operational limit to prevent any further
down travel.
5. End-Travel (hardstop) - Physical limit to translation.
6. Up-Limit (hardstop) - Physical limit to hoisting.
7. Slow Zone - Region of travel where a reduction in hoist speed is mandatory and automatic.
8. Non-Simultaneous Motion - Automatic restriction against simultaneous hoisting and translating
motions.
9. Grapple Release - An interlock to prevent opening a grapple under load.
10. Bridge Travel - An interlock at a predetermined operational bridge travel limit.
11. Trolley Travel - An interlock at a predetermined operational trolley travel limit.
12. Slack Cable - An interlock actuated at a loss of cable load to prevent further downward travel.
93
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
13. Translation Inhibit - An interlock to prevent bridge or trolley movement unless its associated hoist
is at or above a predetermined operational up position
14. Robotic systems should be provided with intelligent systems to avoid known structures and
obstacles. This may include direct sensing of obstacles or knowledge based systems that have
been preloaded with the location of obstacles.
15. Remotely controlled systems should be provide with a backup means of safe release of attached
radiological hazardous materials, to facilitate remote recovery of failed remote handling
equipment for repair.
16. Redundancy of critical controls should be provided to prevent single mode control failure of
remote or robotic equipment causing unplanned or unanticipated equipment motion.
17. Provision should be made for maintenance of anticipated large capacity remote or robotic
equipment in the presence of personnel, without creating impact hazard to the personnel. It is
anticipated the most equipment will require a minimum of maintenance functions while energized,
typical of robotic systems. This must be provided for in a personnel safe manner.
18. The expected high presence of radio frequency and magnetic fields during both normal and off
normal operation should not create hazards to personnel through unplanned movements or other
means.
Manual bypasses for interlocks may be supplied at the discretion of the designer.
Electrical
The remote maintenance systems should be designed to the equivalent of the National Fire Protection
Association Class 1, Division 1 requirements. It is assumed, but not required, that this would be met
with the pressurized, interlocked systems approach.
Section 85
Function Protection for Natural Phenomena
Safety functions should be assured for loads from natural phenomena. Design should provide for
protection of safety-class equipment and systems from potential failure of non-safety-class hardware
during natural phenomena events.
Tests and Inspections
Provisions should be made for the periodic tests and inspections of structures, components, and
systems within the remote handling system. The tests and inspections should be performed in
accordance with applicable codes and standards. Provisions should be made in the design of the
equipment to allow testing the following components on a scheduled basis:
1. Electrical Test Capabilities - The design should include provisions to allow testing electrical safety
features and controls to verify at least the following:
2. All limit switches are operable and functioning as required.
94
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
3. All controlling signals from sensing devices are within specifications.
4. All control switches are operable.
5. All indicating instrumentation is operable and within specified accuracy.
6. All annunciators are operable as specified.
7. All electrical interlocks are operable and functioning as required.
Mechanical Test Capabilities
The design should include provisions to test mechanical safety features and controls to verify at least
the following:
1. Proper performance of all load cells.
2. All motors are operable and functioning as required.
3. Hoist load and brake tests.
Special Test Capability
The design should include provisions to perform any special testing that is unique to that equipment.
Design Considerations
General
Most of the remote handling system will be located in the fusion facility. Most remote handling
systems’ components will be idle during normal plant operation. The area around the fusion device
could be subjected to intense electromagnetic, thermal, neutron and gamma radiation environments.
Persistent low levels of hydrogen, deuterium, and tritium gases, as well as potential high levels of
these gases during unplanned events, should be considered. Activated dust from plasma facing
components may be present during maintenance or accident conditions and should be considered.
The design should provide for the following general criteria:
1. The remote handling system should be designed such that the operator will not be exposed to a
whole body radiation dose rate greater than the current exposure limits. The maximum allowable
exposure to tritium must be observed.
2. Allowances should be made for equipment movement so that, in performing intended operations,
safe distances can be maintained from personnel in normally accessible work areas.
3. Equipment should be located in areas accessible for operation, testing, inspection, and
maintenance. Where this is not possible, a means of safely retrieving the equipment to a safe area
should be provided. This requirement must include backup methods of safely disconnecting from
radiological hazardous materials, for which the remote equipment is intended.
95
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
4. Control panels should be located to afford the operator a full view of the equipment.
5. Equipment should fail safe upon the loss of motive power.
6. Safety features should be incorporated such that failure of one of the drive mechanisms or any
component of the equipment will not result in exposure of personnel to radiation in excess of 2.5
mrem/hr while recovering from such failure.
Section 86
7. Redundancy of critical controls should be provided to prevent single mode control failure of
remote or robotic equipment causing unplanned or unanticipated equipment motion.
8. The expected high levels of radio frequency and magnetic interference potentially present should
not interfere with control systems on the normal operation of systems.
9. The presence of large quantities of cryogenic materials during both normal and off-normal
conditions must be considered in the design of remote equipment.
Radiation Shielding
Design should provide radiation shields between the fusion facility and the remote handling system
components in order to reduce exposure to the system components.
Structural Design Codes
The design, fabrication, testing, and inspection of safety-class and safety-significant remote handling
equipment should be in accordance with commercial codes and standards applicable to that particular
type of equipment. The majority of the systems and components should be considered as non
nuclear-safety (NNS) and should be designed and fabricated to industrial standard requirements
outlined in this volume.
Hydrogen Fires and Detonation
Remote handling systems should not initiate a fire or detonation in normal or anticipated off-normal
events in the presence of hydrogen gases. Safety-significant remote handling systems and
components may fail in a fire or detonation event, but the failure should not degrade the function of
an adjacent safety-class system, structure or component. Safety-class equipment should withstand
the effects of design basis fire or detonation and retain its basic safety functions.
Expected Hazards
General Requirements
Normal industrial hazards associated with large, automated facilities will be present in a fusion
facility. Remote handling facilities should address all of those in their basic design.
In addition, a series of specialized hazards may exist during normal or off normal operation whose
combination is unique. The following sections discuss the unique hazards that also must be addressed
in the basic system design.
96
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
In some off normal excursions it is not expected that remote equipment always continue to be
operable, but in all cases it should not contribute to problems through its failure mode and should be
recoverable to a safe area.
High Power Equipment in Confined Spaces.
The physical hazards of high power and/or automated systems in restrictive spaces should be
addressed. Very high capacity and rigid systems (typical of high precision) will be present, with
possibly multiple systems in a common workspace. The hazards associated with this should be
addressed.
Plasma Energy
Plasma energy will be present within the fusion facility during normal operation. During off normal
excursions the plasma energy will be dissipated into its surroundings, in an extremely short period of
time. The rapid collapse of a plasma field will create very large electromagnetic transients and
runaway electrons.
Remote equipment either operating or stored within range of the plasma energy must be able to
withstand any off normal event that equipment is intended to address. From other off normal events,
all critical equipment should be safely recoverable.
Cryogenic
Cryogenic materials in large quantities (e.g. liquid nitrogen, and liquid helium) will be present many
areas around the fusion facility. Remote equipment intended to work near or service cryogenic
facilities should provide appropriate materials of construction. Seals, wire insulation, etc. should be
appropriately chosen or protected.
Section 87
Radiological Fields
Radiological fields will be normally present at high levels during operation and at decaying levels
during outages. During the life of a fusion facility, the outage levels of ionizing radiation are expected
to be continually increasing, due to activation of metals.
The primary hazards to the remote handling equipment are high energy ionizing radiation (gamma and
some beta), and neutrons. The expected results to the equipment are activation of materials,
degradation of non-metallics, and destruction of electronics. The latter is expected to have the most
severe effect on the operability of the remote systems.
Electronic systems will be most vulnerable to the direct gamma attack, and, to a lesser extent, damage
due to neutrons and runaway electrons. Shielding or remote placement of electronics appropriately
should be designed into all systems. Cameras for remote maintenance will require radiation-resistant
optics and shielding of electronics.
97
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Radiological Contamination
Radiological contamination concerns include tritium and activated dust from plasma facing
components. The tritium contamination is primarily a personnel protection concern that effects the
design of systems or modules and is not a direct threat to equipment. However, any high stress
components that see a significant tritium environment must be monitored for hydrogen embrittlement.
The direct contamination of equipment from other radiological materials is a potential. Equipment
design should allow for rapid decontamination and maintenance to ensure operability and minimize
personnel exposure potential.
Magnetic Fields
The magnetic fields associated with the fusion facility magnets is very large. A constant magnetic
field will be present near the torus and extremely large transient fields occur during plasma
disturbances.
The electrical interference caused by the above field transients should not cause critical electronic
failures or unexpected responses from remote handling equipment. A significant level of
electromagnetic interference is expected due to routine magnet cycling. The remote equipment must
be able to accommodate this interference without damage.
Radio Frequency Fields
High radio frequency (RF) fields are normally present near the torus. Remote handling equipment
in this vicinity should be able to accommodate the resultant interference as a normal occurrence.
Hydrogen Isotopes
Hydrogen generation is a potential result of plasma excursions or excursions of other process
materials into the plasma, during off normal excursions. Tritium and deuterium are also potentially
present during off normal events.
All of the hydrogen isotopes are equally flammable, and when present near the remote handling
equipment present an equipment and personnel hazard. The oxidized state of tritium is a particular
personnel hazard.
Materials Of Construction
Material Considerations
The acceptable materials of construction for equipment in the vicinity of the fusion facility are
affected by the hazards unique to a fusion facility. Major areas of concern are the activation of
materials by the intense neutron bombardment, the degradation of materials by all forms of radiation,
and the contamination of surfaces from the transfer of radiological materials.
98
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Section 88
The activation and degradation issues should be addressed by the careful choice of materials, to
minimize these effects. The contamination issue should be addressed by careful surface preparation
to both prevent the entrapment of radiological materials and facilitate the removal of material.
Replaceable materials should be radiation tolerant to 1 x 109 rads of cumulative dosage. Materials
that are inaccessible or otherwise difficult to replace should be radiation tolerant to 1 x 109 rads
cumulative exposure.
Material Requirements
All structural materials used should be chosen for their non oxidizing surface characteristics and
resistance to neutron activation, to the extent possible. Stainless steels should be used unless other
materials are agreed upon.
Non metallic materials should be chosen for their resistance to neutron activation and to radiological
degradation. The failure mode of the materials should not directly cause failures of other systems
(e.g. elastomers that become liquids upon radiological exposure). Non metallic materials should not
be used that cause degradation of adjoining metallic materials, such as materials that release chlorine.
All metallic and non metallic materials used should be resistant to the chemical, high temperature, low
temperature, and other hazards unique to fusion facilities. The specific hazards to be addressed are
relative to the equipment's expected location within the fusion facility.
Metal surface characteristics should be smooth and free of paints or coatings, with the exception of
strippable coatings used for decontamination. High polish or electropolished surfaces are preferred,
due to their ease of decontamination.
All metallic and non metallic materials should be resistant to decontamination processes to be used
prior to maintenance. These methods include cleaning with high pressure water, cryogenic materials,
and mild acids. Special care must be used to prevent gaps and crevices from entrapping and retaining
radiological materials.
Wiring Requirements
Wiring should be resistant to radiological damage to the levels stated in this report. All cabling
should be protected from physical hazards expected within the very large fusion facility.
Cabling should be adequately shielded from the high magnetic and radio frequency fields it is expected
to encounter. The shielding should be such that the equipment serviced by that cabling is adequately
protected from cabling induced interference.
Electrical connectors and wiring methods (per National Electrical Code definitions, or equivalent)
should be used to minimize repair or replacement time. Sealed, quick-disconnect connectors should
be used wherever possible and all individual wiring methods (e.g. terminal strips) should be avoided.
These requirements are intended to minimize the exposure of personnel related to maintenance.
99
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
The wiring count from remote equipment to personnel areas should be minimized. The failure
potential for remote handling equipment is directly related to the amount of vulnerable wiring, and
connectors required from the work area.
Maintenance of Remote Handling Equipment
All remote handling equipment will potentially require maintenance while radiologically activated or
contaminated (tritium or other), and should be designed accordingly. Maintenance requirements
should allow for personnel using rubber gloves, plastic suits, or similar personal protective equipment.
Additionally, the time required to perform maintenance may be directly related to the resultant
exposure of personnel to radiological hazards.
Section 89
Maintenance methods should allow for rapid replacement of components or modules utilizing quick
disconnects for all services. Fasteners should be designed for gloved handling and be a captive type
if possible.
Contamination Control
Surface contamination from tritium and activated dust should be considered in remote handling
system design. The design should allow for rapid surface decontamination, when needed, to ensure
function and minimize personnel exposure potential. The design should allow for external liquid
contact and should have surface finishes that facilitate decontamination. The potential for tritium
entrapment is assumed to be a potential problem for all remote systems.
Assembly and Disassembly Techniques
All systems should be of modular construction, if possible, to facilitate maintenance. Modules can
be replaced or relocated to other maintenance facilities with less potential for personnel exposure.
Systems for use in highly congested areas must also allow for modular construction to a sufficient
degree to allow for access and recovery of components.
Systems or modules of systems should provide for handling by fully protected personnel (e.g. plastic
suits) with a minimum of special requirements. Permanent lifting points are desired, and lifting slings
(ropes, cables, straps) should be avoided.
Gloved or double gloved hand compatible electrical and service connectors should be used to
facilitate connections. Sharp edges or rough surfaces are to be particularly avoided, to prevent
compromising protective clothing.
Special Handling Requirements
The handling of typically large and powerful remote equipment in confined spaces and the subsequent
maintenance of that equipment should be a design factor. The problem of live system troubleshooting
in such an environment is of particular concern. System designs should allow for a methodology of
required personnel work without hazard to personnel.
100
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Past Design Practices
Activation Control Methods
The choice of materials of construction is the only known means of minimizing the activation of
materials from neutron bombardment. For metallic materials, the over riding structural and
contamination concerns require the usage of activating materials, usually stainless steel. For non
metallic materials, if possible, materials of lower activation potential should be utilized, for greases,
elastomers, etc.
Contamination Control Methods
Tritium contamination is volumetric in nature and can not be easily eliminated. The contamination
by other materials can be minimized by surface condition induced entrapment. Smooth surfaces and
no surface coatings will both minimize contamination and simplify decontamination.
Electronics Protection Methods
The very high electrical and magnetic normal and transient fields potentially present in the fusion
facility will present a hazard to all electronics systems. Maximum protection should be provided for
all interferences that will normally occur as to not interfere with routine operation of remote handling
operations. The off normal interferences should not prevent safe retrieval of equipment for repair,
and must not introduce unwanted motions; but off normal excursions may result in discontinuation
of operation.
Internal Wiring Methods
Section 90
Wiring through sections and/or modules of remote handling equipment should be provided within the
equipment. Externally deployed wiring is expected to present an undesirable hazard to operations.
The damage to or damage by externally routed cabling has historically represented an impediment to
successful operation. The wiring connectors between sections should also be internal, for operability
reasons and to address the requirements shown in the following section.
Operational Requirements
Mode of Operation
The remote handling systems may be operated in the following modes:
Fully Robotic
Telerobotic
Teleoperation
Manual
101
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
All systems should be operable in the operational modes of less sophistication than their normal mode.
For example, robotic systems should also be operable telerobotic, etc. This requirement is to
facilitate recovery from off normal or unanticipated events without personnel entry.
Programmed assistance should be provided in the form of graphics based work cell modeling, or
similar, coupled to the movements of any automated system. This should display the location of all
known obstacles or objects within a work cell and the present location of the remote system. The
control systems should display all programmed motions in the modeled environment, in real time, with
display before movement capabilities. This will allow all actions to be tested before operations are
started.
Collision Avoidance
The most desirable mode of operation is with active system control to prevent operation in areas of
exclusion. In this type of operation, the control system portion of a robotic, telerobotic, or
teleoperational system will intervene when commands (either manual or programmed) direct a system
into a predetermined exclusion area. The environment can be either statistically modeled, when
unchanging, or actively modeled, when dynamic. The active modeling can be vision based, structured
light sensed, or similar.
The control system should be the primary means of obstacle avoidance. Active sensors on systems
should also be provided where needed to avoid high damage potential collisions.
Multiple Remote Device Coordination
Multiple remote handling systems in the same or overlapping workspace(s) are anticipated. All such
systems should have coordinated motions, to prevent their direct interaction. When two systems have
an interaction potential, one system will be designated as the lead and the other the follower.
Swing Free Crane Technology
The development of “swing free” technology for cranes or crane systems has been sufficiently
demonstrated as having significant economic payback on any crane like system. It should be provided
for all remote handling facilities, for which it is appropriate.
Retrieval Requirements
Redundancy of Critical Controls.
All remote handling system controls that, on failure, can cause either (1) a system to perform
unintended motions, or (2) a system to fail in a non-recoverable mode, should be redundant, to
prevent a common mode failure. This requirement is in addition to normal emergency stops. etc.,
which required a personnel intervention to be effective.
Remote Release
Remote handling systems must be provided with provision to safely release from highly hazardous
loads or materials, in the event of other system failures.
102
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Safe Return of Equipment
Section 91
Remote handling systems must be recoverable to a safe area for repair, without undo exposure to
personnel. The failure of a critical system must not prevent some secondary means of recovering that
equipment for repair, if its usage is required to continue operation.
Recommended Design Practices
Potential Safety Functions
Remote handling systems perform a number of safety functions to minimize personnel exposure to
radiation and other hazards during normal and off-normal conditions. In addition, system safety
functions may be required to prevent or mitigate the off-site consequences of off-normal events.
Potential safety functions include:
1. Erect portable radiation shielding panels
2. Place or relocate experimental devices or other equipment in high radiation fields
3. Test or inspect SSCs as necessary to assure performance of safety functions
4. Replace equipment or components in high radiation fields
5. Decontaminate SSCs in preparation for maintenance
6. Install/place diagnostic instruments
7. Install consequence mitigation devices in high radiation fields or otherwise unsafe conditions.
Safety Related-Design Guidance
Remote handling systems may be operated and stored near the fusion device in an area subject to
intense magnetic, thermal, neutron and gamma radiation environments. Persistent low levels of
hydrogen, deuterium, and tritium gases, as well as potential high levels of these gases during
unplanned events, may be present and should be considered in design. Activated dust from plasma
facing components may be present during maintenance or accident conditions and should be
considered. The design should accommodate the following general guidance:
1. The remote handling system should be designed such that the operator will not be exposed to a
whole body radiation dose rate greater than the current exposure limits.
2. Remote handling systems and components should not cause a collision with safety systems or
components while performing normal or abnormal plant maintenance. Wiring through sections
and / or modules of remote handling equipment should be provided within the equipment.
3. Allowances should be made for equipment movement so that, in performing intended operations,
safe distances can be maintained from personnel in normally accessible work areas.
103
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
4. Equipment should be located in areas accessible for operation, testing, inspection, and
maintenance. Where this is not possible, a means of safely retrieving the equipment to a safe area
should be provided. This must include backup methods of safely disconnecting from radiological
hazardous materials, for which the remote equipment is intended.
5. Control panels should be located to afford the operator a full view of the equipment.
6. Equipment should fail safe upon the loss of motive power.
7. Safety features should be incorporated such that failure of one of the drive mechanisms or any
component of the equipment will not result in exposure of personnel to radiation in excess of 2.5
mrem/hr while recovering from such failure.
8. Redundancy of critical controls should be provided to prevent single mode control failure of
remote or robotic equipment causing unplanned or unanticipated equipment motion.
9. The expected high levels of radio frequency and magnetic interference potentially present should
not interfere with control systems or the normal operation of systems.
Section 92
10. The presence of large quantities of cryogenic materials during both normal and off-normal
conditions must be considered in the design of remote equipment.
11. Design should provide radiation shields between the fusion facility and the remote handling
system components in order to reduce exposure to the system components.
Structural Design
The design, fabrication, testing, and inspection of safety-class and safety-significant remote handling
equipment should be in accordance with commercial codes and standards applicable to that particular
type of equipment. The majority of the systems and components should be considered as non
nuclear-safety (NNS) and should be designed and fabricated to industrial standard requirements. The
design allowables for safety-class or safety-significant remote handling systems and components
should be in accordance with codes identified in Section o, Design Guidance for Typical Systems.
Allowable design stresses in mechanical components should provide a factor of safety of 5 when
under rated load. Brittle fracture and fatigue during all operation and testing conditions should be
design considerations.
Joint and weld details should be designed to prevent lamellar tearing.
Materials
Materials of construction for equipment in the fusion facility are affected by a unique combination of
hazards. Major concerns are the activation of materials by the intense neutron bombardment , the
degradation of materials by all forms of radiation, and the contamination of surfaces from the transfer
of radiological materials.
Activation and degradation issues should be addressed by careful choice of materials. Replaceable
materials should be radiation tolerant to 1 x 108 rads of cumulative dosage. Materials that are
104
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
inaccessible or otherwise difficult to replace should be radiation tolerant to 1 x 109 rads cumulative
exposure. All structural materials used should be chosen for their non-oxidizing surface
characteristics and resistance to neutron activation, to the extent possible. Stainless steels should be
used unless other materials are agreed upon. Non-metallic materials should be chosen for their
resistance to neutron activation and to radiological degradation. The failure mode of the materials
should not directly cause failures of other systems (e.g. elastomers that become liquids upon
radiological exposure). Non-metallic materials should not be used that cause degradation of adjoining
metallic materials, such as materials that release chlorine.
All metallic and non-metallic materials used should be resistant to the chemical, high temperature, low
temperature, and other anticipated hazards. The specific hazards to be addressed are relative to the
equipment's expected location within the fusion facility.
The contamination issue should be addressed by careful surface selection and preparation to prevent
the entrapment of radiological materials and facilitate the removal of material. Metal surface
characteristics should be smooth and free of paints or coatings, with the except of strippable coatings
used for decontamination. High polish or electropolished surfaces are preferred, due to their ease of
decontamination.
All metallic and non-metallic materials should be resistant to decontamination processes to be used
prior to maintenance. These methods include cleaning with high pressure water, cryogenic materials,
and mild acids. Special care must be used to prevent gaps and crevices from entrapping and retaining
radiological materials.
Section 93
Electrical
The remote systems should be designed to the equivalent of the National Fire Protection Association
Class 1, Division 1 requirements. It is assumed, but not required, that this would be met with the
pressurized, interlocked systems approach.
Wiring should be resistant to radiological damage. All cabling should be protected from physical
hazards expected within the very large fusion facility.
Cabling should be adequately shielded from the high magnetic and radio frequency fields it is expected
to encounter. The shielding should be such that the equipment serviced by that cabling is adequately
protected from cabling induced interference.
Electrical connectors and wiring methods (per National Electrical Code definitions, or equivalent)
should be used to minimize repair or replacement time. Sealed, quick disconnect type, connectors
should be used wherever possible and all individual wiring methods (e.g. terminal strips) should be
avoided. These requirements are intended to minimize the exposure of personnel related to
maintenance.
The wiring count from remote equipment to personnel areas should be minimized. The failure
potential for remote handling equipment is directly related to the amount of vulnerable wiring, and
connectors required from the work area.
105
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Tests and Inspections
Provisions should be made to allow testing on a scheduled basis in accordance with applicable codes
and standards to verify:
1. All limit switches are operable and functioning as required.
2. All controlling signals from sensing devices are within specifications.
3. All control switches are operable.
4. All indicating instrumentation is operable and within specified accuracy.
5. All annunciators are operable as specified.
6. All electrical interlocks are operable and functioning as required.
7. Proper performance of all load cells.
8. All motors are operable and functioning as required.
9. Hoist load and brake tests.
10. Any special function that is unique to the equipment.
Assembly and Disassembly Techniques
All systems should be of modular construction, if possible, to facilitate maintenance. Modules can
be replaced or relocated to other maintenance facilities with less potential for personnel exposure.
Systems for use in highly congested areas must also allow for modular construction to a sufficient
degree to allow for access and recovery of components.
Systems or modules of systems should provide for handling by fully protected personnel (e.g. plastic
suits) with a minimum of special requirements. Permanent lifting points are desired, and lifting slings
(ropes, cables, straps) should be avoided.
Gloved or double gloved hand compatible electrical and service connectors should be used to
facilitate connections. Sharp edges or rough surfaces are to be particularly avoided, to prevent
compromising protective clothing.
Special Handling Requirements
The handling of typically large and powerful remote equipment in confined spaces and the subsequent
maintenance of that equipment should be a design factor. The problem of live system troubleshooting
in such an environment is of particular concern. System designs should allow for methodology of
required personnel work without hazard to personnel.
106
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Design Guidance for Typical Systems
Typical remote handling systems and equipment include:
CCTV ( Closed Circuit television )
Electro-Mechanical Manipulator
Cranes
Master Slave manipulators
Section 94
Hoists
Remote (“Hanford”) Connector System
Specialized Tools (Reach Rods etc.)
Robots
Descriptions and design guidance for each type follows.
Closed Circuit Television (CCTV)
Closed circuit TV is generally used to monitor the remotely performed handling and operations
activities. The CCTV equipment should meet the electrical performance standards for monochrome
television studio facilities EIA Standard EIA-170-57 Electrical Performance Standards
Monochrome Television Studio Facilities (Nov., 1957) and EIA Standard IETNTS1 Color Television
Studio Picture Line Amplifier Output Drawing (Nov., 1977) (Partial Revision of EIA-170). CCTV
electrical wiring should be in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical Code.
The radiation hardness of the required CCTV system is a function of the particular application, with
significant cost and complexity advantages to the non radiation hardened systems, when they are
applicable. Each application should define its realistic radiation hardness needs.
Electro Mechanical Manipulator
Design, fabrication, inspection, and testing of Electro-Mechanical Manipulator (EMM) should comply
with the requirements of following codes and standards:
Controls NEMA ICS 1-1993 Industrial Control and Systems: General Requirements
NEMA ICS 2 through ICS 10 Industrial Control and Systems
Electrical NFPA 70 National Electrical Code 1993 Edition
107
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Related References:
Design Guide, Manipulators, Auxiliary Tools, and Handling Devices, ANS 11.9, February, 1985.
Force Reflecting Hand Controller for Manipulator Teleoperation, Section 1.3 Final Technical
Report NASA Contract # NAS7-1069, Dec. 1991.
Cranes
Design, fabrication, inspection, testing of cranes should be in accordance with the following codes
and standards:
Cranes and Hoists: CMAA #70-1975 - “Specifications for Electric Overhead Traveling Cranes,
and CMAA #74-1974 - “Specifications for Top Running and Under Running Single Girder
Electric Overhead Traveling Cranes and /or ANSI/ASME NOG-1-1989: Overhead and
Gantry Cranes (Top Running Bridge, Multiple Girder), Rules for Construction of,
ANSI/ASME B30.16-1993: Overhead Hoists (Underhung), and
ANSI/ASME NUM-1-1996 Rules for Construction of Cranes, Monorails, and Hoists (with
Bridge or Trolley or Hoist of the Underhung Type)
Seismic Analysis: CMAA #70 Specification for Electric Overhead Traveling Cranes and /or
ANSI/ASME NOG-1-1989: Overhead and Gantry Cranes (Top Running Bridge, Multiple
Girder), Rules for Construction of,
Overhead and Gantry Cranes: ANSI/ASME B30.2-1996: Overhead and Gantry Cranes (Top
Running Bridge, Single or Multiple Girder, Top Running Trolley Hoist)
Hooks: ANSI/ASME B30.10-1993: Hooks
Electrical: NFPA 70: National Electrical Code 1993 Edition, Art 610
IPCEA S-61-402 and IEEE Standard 835-1994, IEEE Standard Power Cable
Ampacity Tables
NEMA MG 1-1993 Motors and Generators
NEMA ICS 1-1993 Industrial Control and Systems: General Requirement,
NEMA WC 3-1992 Rubber Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and
Distribution of Electrical Energy (ICEA S-19-1981 Sixth Edition)
ANSI C2 ANSI C2-1997 e: National Electrical Safety Code
Fire Protection: ANSI/NFPA 12 Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems ANSI/NFPA 12
NFPA 72: National Fire Alarm Code
Factory Mutual Approval Guide
108
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
The cranes should be provided with all components and appurtenances required for safe operation
and handling, in accordance with the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
Regulations Section 1910.179 and ANSI B30.2, ANSI B30.1, B30.16 Safety Codes as applicable.
Section 95
Remote Manipulators
Design, fabrication, inspection and testing of Remote Manipulators should be in conformance with
applicable requirements of the following codes and standards:
Hooks - ANSI/ASME B30.10-1993: Hooks, and ANSI/ASME B30.1-1992: Jacks
Hydraulic Power - ANSI/(NFPA/JIC) T2.24.1-1991: Hydraulic Fluid Power - Systems Standard
for Stationary Industrial Machinery
Hoists
Auxiliary hoists should be designed and manufactured to comply with the Hoist Manufacturers
Institute Specification HMI 100 for Electric Wire Rope Hoists and/or ANSI/ASME HST-4M-1991
(R1996): Performance Standard for Overhead Electric Wire Rope Hoists.
Remote Connector Systems
Remote connector systems (sometimes referred to as “Hanford” type) can be used in the process
piping as mechanical jumpers. This type of jumper system allows remote assembly and disassembly
of mechanical components such as pumps, valves, pressure vessels, etc. These mechanical jumpers
and/or connectors can be remotely operated. The design, fabrication, inspection, and testing of these
connector/jumpers and associated equipment should be per manufacturer standards.
Remote connector systems (or jumpers) typically consist of rigid or semi-rigid piping or conduit, for
process or electrical service, fitted with remotely coupled end connectors. The remote coupling is
accomplished with crane, manipulator, or robot induced locking or unlocking. The assemblies must
be designed for routine usage under typically harsh environmental conditions.
The electrical type connector systems must protect the connecting pins or sockets from damage
during the coupling operations. The internal wiring and connector pins/sockets must be suitable for
their electrical service relative to amperage, shielding requirement, etc. The entire assembly must
meet the electrical classification requirements of the particular service. Historically, electrical systems
have incorporated hard clamping, seals, and rigid conduits to meet classification requirements as
sealed pressurized housings.
Specialized Tools
Specialized tools such as custom designed fixtures , wrenches, reach rods, manipulators etc. can be
designed for specific requirements of handling and operation of a particular equipment associated with
fusion facility plant. These can be custom designed and fabricated using good engineering and
industry practices.
109
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Robots
Industrial robots, custom designed robots, and robotic manipulators can perform certain handling
functions. The robot systems consists of four major subsystems: the mechanical unit, drive, control
system, and tooling.
The mechanical unit consists of a fabricated structural frame with provisions for supporting
mechanical linkage and joints, guides, actuators, control valves, limiting devices, and sensors. The
physical dimensions, design, and loading capability of the robot depend upon the application
requirements.
Most new robots use electric drives. Pneumatic drives have been used for high speed, non servo
robots and are often used for powering tools such as grippers. Hydraulic drives have been used for
heavier lift systems, or where severe service is anticipated.
Electric drive systems can provide both lift and/or precision, depending on the motor and servo
system selection and design. An AC or DC-powered motor may be used depending on the system
design and applications. Hydraulic robots should be provided with operational fluids considered non
hazardous (i.e. not flammable or corrosive, negligible radiolytic effects, etc.), to avoid the creation
of mixed waste. Mixed waste is the combination of hazardous and radiological components in the
same waste form, and is extremely difficult to process.
Section 96
Most industrial robots incorporate computer or microprocessor-based controllers. These perform
computational functions, and interface with and control sensors, grippers, tooling, and other
peripheral equipment. The control system also performs sequencing and memory functions associated
with communication and interfacing for on-line sensing, branching, and integration of other
equipment. Controller programming may be done on-line or from remote, off-line control stations.
Robot controllers can have self-diagnostic capability, which can reduce the downtime of robot
systems. In addition, the robot controller may be in a control hierarchy in which it receives
instructions and reports positions or gives directions. Robot manufacturers typically use proprietary
language for programming robot controllers and systems.
Tooling is manipulated by the robot to perform the functions required for the application. Depending
on the application, the robot may have one functional capability, such as making spot welds or spray
painting. These capabilities may be integrated with the robots mechanical system or may be attached
at the robot’s wrist-end effector interface. Alternatively, the robot may use multiple tools that may
be changed manually or automatically during a work cycle.
110
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Table II-5 following shows Standards and Codes used for robot design, fabrication and safety
requirements.
Table 5 Standards and codes for robots.
Group Standard Subject
1. ANSI/RIA R15.06-1992 Robotic Industries Association standards for
Industrial robots and robot systems
2. BSR/RIA BSR/RIA R15.06-1992 (ANSI) Board of Standards Review proposed
standard for industrial robots and robot systems
3. ANSI/RIA R15.02-1990 Human engineering design criteria for hand-
held robot control pendants
4. OSHA Pub. 2254 (revised) Training requirements in standards and training
guidelines
5. NIOSH Pub. 88-108 Safe maintenance guidelines for robotics
workstations
6. OSHA Pub. 8-1.3, 1987 Guidelines for robotics safety
7. OSHA 29 CFR 1910.147 Control of hazardous energy source)
(lockout/tagout final rule)
8. AFOSH 127-12, 1991 Occupational safety machinery
9. OSHA DOE/EH-0353P OSHA Technical Reference Manual
111
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Section II References
10CFR50(A) 10CFR50, Appendix A, “General Design Criteria for Nuclear Power Plants,”
specifically criteria 1, 13, 19, 20, 22, 23, 24 and 64.
10CFR50(I) 10CFR50, Appendix I, “Numerical Guides for Design Objectives and
Limiting Conditions for Operation to Meet the Criterion ‘As Low As
Reasonably Achievable” for Radioactive Material in Light Water-Cooled
Nuclear Power Plant Effluents.”
10CFR820 Procedural Rules for DOE Nuclear Activities
10CFR830 Nuclear Safety Management
10CFR835 Occupational Radiation Protection
ACI 318 ACI 318, “Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete,” 1989
ACI 349 ACI 349, “Code Requirements for Nuclear Safety Related Concrete
Structures and Commentary,” 1985
AISC 84 American Institute of Steel Constructors (AISC) standard N690,
“Specification for Design, Fabrication and Erection,” 1984.
AISC 86a AISC, “Manual of Steel Construction and Specification for the Design,
Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings,” 9 Edition, 1986
AISC 86b AISC-LRFD, “Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural
Steel Buildings,” 1 Edition, 1986
AISC N690 American Institute of Steel Constructors (AISC) standard N690,
“Specification for Design, Fabrication and Erection,” 1984.
Section 97
ANSI 83. American National Standard Institute/American Nuclear Society
(ANSI/ANS), ANSI/ANS 51.1-1983, “Nuclear Safety Criteria for the Design
of Stationary Pressurized Water Reactor Plants.”
ANSI 84 ANSI/AISC N690, “Nuclear Facilities Steel Safety Related Structures Design,
Fabrication and Erection,” 1984
ANSI-89 ANSI/IEEE C37.010-1979 (R1989) “Application Guide for AC High-Voltage
Circuit Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis (includes supplements
ANSI/IEEE C37.010b and C37.010d)
ANSI 90 ANSI/RIA R15.02-1-1990, “Human Engineering Design Criteria for Hand-
Held Robot Control Pendants”
112
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
ANSI-92 ANSI/ANS 3.8.5-1992 “Criteria for Emergency Radiological Field
Monitoring, Sampling, and Analysis”
ANSI 92b ANSI/RIA R15.06-1992, “Industrial Robots and Robot Systems - Safety
Requirements”
ANSI 93 American National Standards Institute (ANSI) ANSI/ASME Standard B31.3,
“Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refinery Piping,” 1993.
ANSI-95 ANSI/ANS 3.8.6-1995 “Criteria for Conduct of Offsite Radiological
Assessment for Emergency Response for Nuclear Power Plants”
ANSI-96 “Rules for Construction of Cranes, Monorails, and Hoists (with Bridge or
Trolley or Hoist of the Underhung Type,” ANSI/ASME NUM-1-1996.
API-620 American Petroleum Institute (API) API-620, “Design and Construction of
Large, Welded, Low-Pressure Storage Tanks, Ninth Edition,” 01-Feb-96
API-650 American Petroleum Institute (API), API-650, “Welded Steel Tanks for Oil
Storage,” 1993.
ASCE 80 “Structural Analysis and Design of Nuclear Plant Facilities,” ASCE, Manual
No. 58, 1980
ASCE 93 ANSI/ASCE, “Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures,”
7-93, ASCE
ASHRAE 91 ASHRAE Handbook of HVAC Application, 1991, Chapter 24 entitled
“HVAC for Nuclear Facilities.”
ASHRAE ASHRAE, “Design Guide for Department of Energy Nuclear Facilities,”
ISBN 1-883413-03-6
ASME 89a ASME N509, “Nuclear Power Plant Air-Cleaning Units and Components” -
1989
ASME 89b ASME N510, “Testing of Nuclear Air Treatment Systems,” 1989
ASME 89c American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME), “Rules for Inservice
Inspection of Nuclear Power Plants,” Section XI, 1989.
ASME 89d ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section IX, “Welding and Brazing
Qualification,” 1989 Edition
ASME 91 ASME Papers:
91-GT-366, “Reliability, Availability, and Maintainability Usage in the
Development of the 501F Combustion Turbine and Auxiliaries.”
113
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
92-GT-208, “Reliability Measurements for Gas Turbine Warranty Situations.”
92-GT-236, “Operating Experience and Site Performance Testing of the
CW251B12 Gas Turbine Engine.”
ASME 93a American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME), “Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code,” 1992 Edition with 1993 Addenda.
ASME 93b ANSI/ASME, “Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refinery Piping,” Standard
B31.3, 1993
ASME 93c ASME AG-1, “Code on Nuclear Air and Gas Treatment,” 1993
ASME 95 ANSI/ASME B40.5-1995, “Snubbers”
ASTM-95 ASTM D5537-94 “Heat Release, Flame Spread and Mass Loss Testing of
Insulating Materials Contained in Electrical or Optical Fiber Cables When
Burning in a Vertical Cable Tray Configuration,” American Society for
Testing and Materials, West Conshohocken, PA,1994.
AWWA D-100 American Water Works Association (AWWA), AWWA D-100, “Welded
Steel Tanks for Water Storage,” 1984, with 1989 Addendum A.
Burchsted 76 A. Burchsted, A. B. Fuller, and J. E. Kahn,
Handbook,” ERDA 76-21, March 1976
“Nuclear Air Cleaning
Section 98
CMAA CMAA #70-1975 - “Specifications for Electric Overhead Traveling Cranes
and CMAA #74-1974 - “Specifications for Top Running and Under Running
Single Girder Electric Overhead Traveling Cranes, Crane Manufacturers
Association of America, 1326 Freeport Road, Pittsburgh, PA, 15238.
DOD 86 “Seismic Design Guidelines for Essential Buildings, a supplement to Seismic
Design for Buildings,” Army TM5-809-10-1, Navy NAVFAC P-355.1, Air
Force AFM 88-3, Tri-Service Manual, Departments of Army, Navy and Air
Force, Washington, D.C., February 1986
DOE 1020 DOE Standard, “Natural Phenomena Hazards Design and Evaluation Criteria
for Department of Energy Facilities,” DOE-STD-1020-94, April 1994
DOE 1021 DOE Standard, “Natural Phenomena Hazards Performance Categorization
Guidelines for Structures, Systems, and Components,” DOE-STD-1021-94
DOE 3003 DOE-DP-STD-3003-93, Back-up Power Sources for DOE DP facilities
DOE 5480.11 DOE Order 5480.11, “Radiation Protection for Occupational Workers, June,
1990.
DOE 5480.23 DOE Order 5480.23, “Nuclear Safety Analysis Reports”
114
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
DOE 5480.28 DOE Order 5480.28, “Natural Phenomena Hazards Mitigation,” January 15,
1993
DOE 5480.4 DOE Order 5480.4, Environmental Protection, Safety and Health Protection
Standards,” May 15, 1984.
DOE 5632.1C DOE Order 5632.1C, “Protection and Control of Safeguards and Security
Interests”
DOE 5633.3B DOE Order 5633.3B, “Control and Accountability of Nuclear Materials,”
September 7, 1994.
DOE 6430.1A DOE Order 6430.1A, General Design Criteria, Division 13, 1989.
EIA-170 “Electrical Performance Standards - Monochrome Television Studio
Facilities,” Electronic Industries Association, November, 1957
EIA-IETNTS1 “Color Television Studio Picture Line Amplifier Output Drawing,” Electronic
Industries Association, Nov., 1977 (Partial Revision of EIA-170)
HEI 80 Heat Exchanger Institute, Inc., “Standard for Power Plant Heat Exchangers,”
1/e, Cleveland, Ohio, 1980.
HIS Hydraulic Institute Standards, Cleveland, Ohio.
HMI 100 “Specification for Electric Wire Rope Hoists,” Hoist Manufacturers Institute,
8720 Red Oak Blvd. Suite 201 - Charlotte, NC 28217
Hord 78 Hord, J., “Is Hydrogen Safe?” International Journal of Hydrogen Energy,
Vol. 3, pp. 157-176, 1978.
IEC 964 Design for Control Rooms of Nuclear Power Plants, (1989-03) International
Electrotechnical Commission 1989.
IEEE 80 IEEE 80-1986, “Guide for Safety in AC substation Grounding”
IEEE 115 IEEE 115-1995, “Test Procedures for Synchronous Machine”
IEEE 142 IEEE 142-1991, “IEEE Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial
and Commercial Power Systems”
IEEE 308 IEEE 308-1991, “IEEE Standard Criteria for Class 1E Power Systems for
Nuclear Power Generating Stations” (see also Regulatory Guide 1.6)
IEEE 317 IEEE 317-1983, “IEEE Standard for Electric Penetration Assemblies in
Containment Structures for Nuclear Power Generating Stations”
IEEE 323 IEEE 323-1983 “Qualifying Class 1E Equipment for Nuclear Power
Generating Stations,” 1983.
115
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
IEEE 336 IEEE 336-1985, “IEEE Standard Installation, Inspection and Testing
Requirements for Power, Instrumentation and Control Equipment at Nuclear
Facilities”
IEEE 338 IEEE 338-1987, “IEEE Standard Criteria for the Periodic Surveillance
Testing of Nuclear Power Generating Station Safety Systems” (see also
Regulatory Guide 1.118)
IEEE 344 IEEE 344-1987 “IEEE Recommended Practice for Seismic Qualification of
Class 1E Equipment for Nuclear Power Generating Stations”
Section 99
IEEE 352 IEEE 352-1987, “IEEE Guide for General Principles of Reliability Analysis
of Nuclear Generating Station Safety Systems
IEEE 379 IEEE 379-1994, “IEEE Standard Application of the Single Failure Criterion
to Nuclear Power Generating Station Safety Systems” (see also Regulatory
Guide 1.53)
IEEE 382 IEEE 382-1996 “IEEE Standard for Qualification of Actuators for Power-
Operated Valve Assemblies with Safety-Related Functions for Nuclear Power
Plants,” (see also regulatory Guide 1.73)
IEEE 383 IEEE 383-1974 “IEEE Standard for Type Testing of Class 1E Electrical
Cables, Field Splices, and Connections for Nuclear Power Generating
Stations”
IEEE 384 IEEE 384-1992 “IEEE Standard Criteria for Independence of Class 1E
Equipment and Circuits,” (see also Regulatory Guide 1.75)
IEEE 386 IEEE 386-1995 “IEEE Standard for Separable Insulated Connector systems
for Power Distribution systems Above 600 V”
IEEE 387 IEEE 387-1995 “IEEE Standard Criteria for Diesel Generator Units Applied
as Standby Power Supplies for Nuclear Power Generating Stations,” (see also
Regulatory Guide 1.9)
IEEE 420 IEEE 420-1982 “IEEE Standard for the Design and Qualification of Class 1E
Control Boards, Panels, and Racks Used in Nuclear Power Generating
Stations”
IEEE 450 Recommended Practice for Maintenance Testing and Replacement of Large
Lead Storage Batteries for Generating Stations and Substations (see also
Regulatory Guide 1.129)
IEEE 485 IEEE 485-1983 “IEEE Recommended Practice for Sizing Large Lead Storage
Batteries for Generating Stations and Substations”
116
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
IEEE 577 IEEE 577-1976 “IEEE Standard Requirements for Reliability Analysis in the
Design and Operation of Safety Systems for Nuclear Power Generating
Stations”
IEEE 603 IEEE 603-1991 “IEEE Standard Criteria for Safety Systems for Nuclear
Power Generating Stations”
IEEE 730 IEEE 730-1989 “IEEE Standard for Software Quality Assurance Plans”
IEEE 829 IEEE 829-1983 “IEEE Standard for Software Test Documentation”
IEEE 830 IEEE 830-1993 “IEEE Recommended Practice for Software Requirements
Specifications”
IEEE 1012 IEEE 1012-1986 “IEEE Standard for Software Verification and Validation
Plans”
IEEE 1016 IEEE 1016-1987
Descriptions”
“IEEE Recommended Practice for Software Design
IEEE 1042 IEEE 1042-1987 “IEEE Guide to Software Configuration Management”
IEEE 1063 IEEE 1063-1987 “IEEE Standard for Software User Documentation”
IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA) Standards: S-19-81
and S-66-524 Publications: P-46-426 and P-54-440
ISA 67.02 S67.02.01: Nuclear Safety-Related Instrument Sensing Line Piping and
Tubing Standard for Use in Nuclear Power Plants
ISA 67.04 S67.04--Part I: Setpoints for Nuclear Safety-Related Instrumentation-
ANSI/ISA-1994
RP67.04--Part II: Methodologies for the Determination of Setpoints for
Nuclear Safety-Related Instrumentation-1994
ISA 67.06
ITER
S67.06: Response Time Testing of Nuclear Safety-Related Instrument
Channels in Nuclear Power Plants--ANSI/ISA-1984
“ITER Outline Design Report” document # ITER TAC-4-01,
“ITER Outline Design Summary” document # ITER TAC-4-02,
“ITER Safety and Environment” document # ITER TAC-4-13.
NEMA ICS 1 “Industrial Control and Systems: General Requirements,” NEMA ICS-1
1993, National Electrical Manufacturers Association, 1993.
117
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
NEMA ICS 2 through ICS 10
Industrial Control and Systems
NEMA MG-1 NEMA Standard MG 1-1993 Motors and Generators
Section 100
NEMA VE-1 NEMA Standard VE 1-1991, Metal Cable Tray Systems
NFPA 12 ANSI/NFPA 12, “Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems,” National Fire
Protection Association.
NFPA 69 NFPA 69, “Explosion Prevention Systems,” National Fire Protection
Association, 1997.
NFPA 70 NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, “Chapter 5, Special Occupancies, Article
500-Hazardous (Classified) Locations,” National Fire Protection Association,
1993.
NFPA 92A NFPA 92A, “Smoke-Control Systems,” National Fire Protection Association,
1996.
NFPA 204M: NFPA 204M, “Smoke and Heat Venting,” National Fire Protection
Association, 1991.
NFPA 262 ANSI/NFPA 262, “Fire and Smoke Characteristics of Wires and Cables,”
National Fire Protection Association, 1994.
NFPA 780 NFPA 780 “Lightning Protection Code,” National Fire Protection
Association, 1995.
NUREG-0800 NUREG-0800, “Standard Review Plan for the Review of Safety Analysis
Reports for Nuclear Power Plants,” Chapter 7.1
RG 1.6 Regulatory Guide 1.6, “Independence Between Redundant Standby (On-Site)
Power Sources and Between Their Distribution Systems
RG 1.30 Regulatory Guide 1.30, “Quality Assurance Requirements for the Installation,
Inspection, and Testing of Instrumentation and Electric Equipment,” August
1972.
RG 1.47 Regulatory Guide 1.47, “Bypassed and Inoperable Status Indication for
Nuclear Power Plant Safety Systems,” US Nuclear Regulatory Commission,
May 1973.
RG 1.53 Regulatory Guide 1.53, “Application of the Single-Failure Criterion to
Nuclear Power Plant Protection Systems”
118
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
RG 1.63 Regulatory Guide 1.63, “Electric Penetration Assemblies in Containment
Structures for Nuclear Power Plants.” U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission,
February 1987.
RG 1.75 Regulatory Guide 1.75, “Physical Independence of Electric Systems,” US
Nuclear Regulatory Commission, September 1978.
RG 1.89 Regulatory Guide 1.89, “Environmental Qualification of Certain Electric
Equipment Important to Safety for Nuclear Power Plants”
RG 1.100 Regulatory Guide 1.100, “Seismic Qualification of Electric and Mechanical
Equipment and Mechanical for Nuclear Power Plants”
RG 1.105 Regulatory Guide 1.105, “Instrument Setpoints for Safety-Related Systems”
RG 1.131 “Qualification Tests of Electric Cables, Field Splices and Connections for
Light-Water Cooled Nuclear Power Reactors”
RG 1.139 “Guidance for Residual Heat Removal”
RG 1.140 Regulatory Guide 1.140, “Design, Testing and Maintenance Criteria for
Normal Ventilation Exhaust System Air Filtration and Absorption Units of
Light Water Cooled Nuclear Power Plants,” US Nuclear Regulatory
Commission, October 1979.
RG 1.153 “Criteria for Power, Instrumentation and Control Portions of Safety Systems”
TEMA Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, “TEMA Standards,” Seventh
Edition, Tarrytown, NY, 1988.
UBC 94 “Uniform Building Code,” International Conference of Building Officials,
Whittier, CA, 1994
UCRL 15910 University of California Research Labs (UCRL), UCRL-15910, “Design and
Evaluation Guidelines for Department of Energy Facilities Subjected to
Natural Phenomena Hazards,” 1990.
West 211 Westinghouse RB211 ECONOPAC - 27 MW Combustion Turbine Packaged
Plant
119
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
120
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
SECTION III
ADMINISTRATIVE AND OPERATIONAL TECHNIQUES
CONCEPT OF OPERATIONS
Purpose
The purpose of this section is to establish a conduct of operations program which should result in
improved quality and uniformity of operations.
Supplemental Guidance
Section 101
Appendix A provides a listing of guidance documents that may be useful in developing the site
specific conduct of operations program.
Policy
Fusion facilities should have a policy that assures: operations are managed, organized and conducted
in a manner to assure an acceptable level of safety; and operators have procedures in place to control
the conduct of their operations.
Guidance
Experience has shown that the better operating facilities have well defined, effectively administered
policies and programs to govern the activities of the operating organization, including the areas
described by these guidelines. The guidance is based upon well developed industrial operations
practices. They are written to be flexible, so that they encompass the range of facilities and
operations.
Each fusion facility should develop a conduct of operations program which covers the following
topics, as appropriate, using a graded approach. Specifics for each of the sections can be found in
the references cited in Appendix A.
Operations Organization and Administration
The organization and administration of operations should ensure that a high level of performance is
achieved through effective implementation and control of operations activities. Operations should
establish a policy of excellence under which the facility is operated and clear lines of responsibility
for normal and emergency conditions are established. Policies, resources, monitoring and
accountability for operations should be established to meet this guideline.
Shift Routines and Operating Practices
Standards for the professional conduct of operations personnel should be established and followed
so that the operator performance meets the expectations of facility management. Specifically,
requirements for watch standing practices and routine shift practices should be established.
121
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Control Area Activities
This area should address important elements of control area activities that are necessary to support
safe and efficient facility operations.
Communications
This area should address important aspects of providing accurate transmission of information within
the facility.
Control of On-Shift Training
This area should address the control of training activities by operations personnel in the area of hands-
on operational experience.
Investigation of Abnormal Events
A process for the investigation of abnormal events should ensure that facility events are thoroughly
investigated to assess the impact of the event, to determine the root cause, and to identify corrective
actions to prevent recurrence of the event.
Notifications
A process to notify appropriate personnel and agencies should be employed by the facility for issues
affecting public health and safety.
Control of Equipment and System Status
A process should be in effect to ensure that the facility configuration is maintained in accordance with
the design requirements and that the operating shift knows the status of the equipment and systems.
Lockouts and Tagout
A process should be in effect provide a method for equipment status control through component
tagging or locking which protects personnel from injury, protects equipment from damage, maintains
operability of plant systems and maintains the integrity of the physical boundaries of plant systems.
Independent Verification
An independent verification process should be established to assure that the correct position of
components such as valves, switches and circuit breakers are maintained to provide a high degree of
reliable operations.
Section 102
Logkeeping
Requirements for operations records should be established which includes narrative logs of the
facilities status and a history of facility operations.
122
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Operations Turnover
A method for shift turnovers should be established so that oncoming operators are provided with an
accurate picture of the overall facility status.
Operations Aspects of Facility Chemistry and Unique Processes
Processes should be established for monitoring chemistry and unique process parameters to promote
maximum component life and reliable operations.
Required Reading
A required reading process should be established so that operations personnel are made aware of
important information that is related to job assignment.
Timely Orders to Operators
Plant management should establish a means to communicate short-term information and
administrative instructions to operations personnel in a timely manner.
Operations Procedures
Operations procedures should be established to provide appropriate direction to ensure that the
facility is operated within its design bases and should be effectively used to support safe operation
of the facility.
Operator Aid Postings
An operator aid process should be established to ensure that operator aids that are posted are current,
correct, and useful.
Equipment and Pipe Labeling
A well established and maintained equipment labeling process should be established to help ensure
that facility personnel are able to positively identify equipment they operate.
EMERGENCY PREPAREDNESS
Purpose
To establish requirements for Emergency Management Programs for operational emergencies
involving fusion facilities. Fusion facilities should develop, using a graded approach, an emergency
management program consistent with the determined level of risk at the facility.
Supplemental Guidance
Appendix B provides a listing of guidance documents that may be useful in developing the site
specific emergency management program.
123
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Appendix C provides a listing of definitions used in this section of the document.
Concept of Operations
The Emergency Management System (EMS) should include a graded approach to emergency
management concepts such as planning, preparedness, and response. “Planning” includes the
development and preparation of emergency plans and procedures and the identification of necessary
personnel and resources to provide an effective response. “Preparedness” includes the training of
personnel, acquisition and maintenance of resources, and exercising of the plans, procedures,
personnel, and resources essential for emergency response. “Response” represents the
implementation of planning and preparedness during an emergency and involves the effective
decisions, actions, and application of resources that must be accomplished to mitigate consequences
and recover from an emergency.
Operational Emergency Event Classes
Emergencies should be characterized as one of the Operational Emergency classes (e.g., Alert, Site
Area Emergency, or General Emergency). Emergency Action Levels (EALs), the specific criteria
used to recognize and categorize events, should be developed for the spectrum of potential
operational emergencies consistent with the hazards assessment.
Alert
Section 103
An event in progress or having occurred which involves an actual or potential substantial reduction
of the level of safety of the facility. Limited offsite releases of radioactive materials may occur. For
other toxic materials, offsite releases are not expected to exceed applicable, permissible limits. The
purpose of an Alert level is to assure that onsite and offsite emergency response personnel are
properly advised and available for activation if the situation becomes more serious, to initiate and
perform confirmatory monitoring as required, and to assure appropriate notification of emergency
conditions to the responsible organizations.
Site Emergency
An event in progress or having occurred which involves actual or likely major failures of facility
functions which are needed for the protection of onsite personnel, the public health and safety, and
the environment. Significant releases offsite of radioactive material are likely or are occurring. For
other toxic materials, offsite releases have the potential to exceed applicable permissible limits. The
purpose of the site emergency level is to assure that emergency control centers are manned,
appropriate monitoring teams are dispatched, personnel required for determining onsite protective
measures are at duty stations, predetermined protective measures for onsite personnel are initiated,
and to provide current information and consultation with offsite officials and organizations.
General Emergency
An event in progress or having occurred which involves actual or imminent substantial reduction of
facility safety systems. Releases offsite of radioactive materials are occurring or expected to occur
and exceed allowable limits. Offsite releases of other toxic materials are expected to exceed
124
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
applicable permissible limits. The purpose of the general emergency level is to initiate predetermined
protective measures for onsite personnel, the public health and safety, and the environment, and to
provide continuous assessment of emergency conditions and exchange of information both onsite and
offsite. Declaration of a general emergency will initiate major activation of resources required to
effectively mitigate the consequences of emergency conditions and assure the protection of onsite
personnel, the public health and safety, and the environment to the extent possible.
Emergency Plans and Procedures
An emergency plan and procedures should be developed for the fusion facility. The plan is a
documented “concept of operation” that describes the essential elements of advance planning that
have been considered and the provisions that have been made to mitigate emergency situations. The
plan should incorporate information about the emergency response roles of supporting organizations
and agencies and should be consistent with a graded approach to managing an incident. Programs
must consist of special emergency plan implementing procedures (e.g., EALs, event categorization,
notification, Emergency Operations Center operation) as well as other procedures currently in use
(e.g., equipment operation, chemistry controls, radiological monitoring, and maintenance) which
would be utilized in, or associated with, emergency response activities.
Procedures must be consistent and compatible with the emergency plan. Emergency procedures must
contain the detailed information and the specific instructions needed to carry out the emergency plan
during a drill, exercise, or actual emergency.
Section 104
Procedures must maintain consistency with the general graded approach and nomenclature of
emergency planning and preparedness elements within Federal and State agencies, private industry,
tribal, and local authorities.
Hazards Assessment
Hazards assessments provide the technical basis for emergency management programs. The extent
of emergency planning and preparedness required for a particular facility directly corresponds to the
type and scope of hazards present and the potential consequences of accidents or events. A hazards
assessment includes identification of any hazards and targets unique to a facility, analyses of potential
accidents or events, and evaluation of potential accident or event consequences.
Methodology, models, and evaluation techniques used in the hazards assessment should be
documented. Also, the hazards assessment should include a determination of the size of the
Emergency Planning Zones where applicable, i.e., the area surrounding the facility for which special
planning and preparedness efforts are required to ensure that prompt and effective protective actions
can be taken to minimize the risk to workers, the general public, and the environment.
Other hazards assessments are documented in Material Safety Data Sheets; Safety Assessments; Spill
Prevention, Control, and Countermeasure Plans; Pre-Fire Plans; Environmental Assessments and
Impact Statements (EAs and EISs); ERPG's; Severe Accident Analyses; and the Emergency and
Hazardous Chemical Inventory Forms and Toxic Chemical Release Forms, prepared pursuant to the
requirements of the Emergency Planning and Community Right-to-Know Act (SARA Title III).
125
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Emergency Response Organization
An emergency response organization should have overall responsibility for the initial and ongoing
response to, and mitigation of, an emergency, and must perform, but not be limited to, the following
functions:
Event categorization, determination of the emergency class, notification, provision of protective
action recommendations, management and decision making, control of onsite emergency activities,
consequence assessment, medical support, public information, activation and coordination of onsite
response resources, security, communications, administrative support, and coordination and liaison
with offsite support and response organizations;
Consist of an adequate number of experienced and trained personnel, including designated alternates,
for timely performance of the functions identified above;
Assign emergency response responsibilities and tasks to specific individuals identified by title, or
position; and
Integrate local agencies and organizations which would be relied upon to provide onsite response
services and include those contractor and private organizations that may be relied upon to provide
specialized expertise and assistance to all emergency planning, preparedness, and readiness assurance
activities.
Offsite Response Interfaces
Provisions should be in place for interface and coordination with Federal, state, tribal, and local
agencies and organizations responsible for offsite emergency response and for protection of the
environment and the health and safety of the general public. Interrelationships with offsite
organizations should be prearranged and documented.
Notification
Provisions should be in place for prompt initial notification of emergency response personnel and
response organizations, including appropriate offsite elements and for continuing effective
communication among the response organizations throughout an emergency.
Section 105
Consequence Assessment
Provisions should be in place to adequately assess the actual or potential onsite and offsite
consequences of an emergency and include:
1. Timely initial assessment of the actual or potential consequences.
2. Integration of consequence assessment with the process for categorization of an event as an
emergency.
3. Monitoring and evaluation of the specific indicators necessary to continually assess the
consequences of emergency events.
126
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
4. Coordination with Federal, state, tribal, and local organizations to locate and track hazardous
materials released to the environment.
Protective Actions
Where applicable, provisions should be in place for predetermined actions to be taken in response to
emergency conditions to protect onsite personnel and the public and include:
1. Protective Action Guides (PAGs) and Emergency Response Planning Guidelines (ERPGs).
2. Control, monitoring, and maintenance of records of onsite personnel exposures to hazardous
materials;
3. Accountability for facility personnel of emergency determination, and timely sheltering and/or
evacuation of workers, in the affected area.
4. Radiological and/or hazardous material decontamination of workers and equipment evacuated
from the site;
5. Determination of the area surrounding the specific facility actually affected by an Operational
Emergency; and
6. Timely recommendation to appropriate offsite organizations of protective actions, such as
sheltering and/or evacuation, for the general public, where applicable.
Medical Support
Provisions should be in place for medical support for workers, including those with radiological
and/or hazardous material contamination, and include:
1. Immediate, onsite first aid and emergency medical treatment capability;
2. Transportation of injured onsite personnel to onsite or offsite medical facilities, as appropriate;
and
3. Documented arrangements with onsite and offsite medical facilities to accept and treat
contaminated, injured personnel.
Recovery and Reentry
Provisions should be made for recovery and reentry from an operational emergency and reentry into
the affected facility. The approach and general procedures for recovery include: decision making and
communications associated with termination of an emergency; dissemination of information to offsite
organizations regarding the emergency and relaxation of public protective actions; establishment of
a recovery organization; and establishment of general criteria for resumption of normal operations.
The means must exist for estimating dosage and for protecting workers and the general public from
hazardous exposure during recovery and reentry activities.
127
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Public Information
An emergency public information program should be developed to ensure that necessary public affairs
actions are planned, coordinated and taken as an integral part of the total emergency response effort.
Emergency Facilities and Equipment
Facilities and equipment, adequate to support emergency response, should be established and
maintained as follows:
1. An Emergency Operations Center (EOC) should be established from which the emergency
response organization assesses, evaluates, coordinates, and directs emergency response activities
and communicates within DOE and offsite response organizations.
2. The staffing, operation, and response activities pertaining to the EOC, should be predetermined
and documented in procedures for a timely and coordinated overall emergency response.
Section 106
3. Primary and backup means of communications should be available.
4. Adequate equipment and supplies should be available and operable for emergency response
personnel to carry out their respective duties and responsibilities.
5. Training
6. Training must be provided to effected workers regarding operational emergencies, and specialized
training must be conducted for workers and be available to offsite emergency response
organizations.
7. Training should be provided annually to workers who may have to take protective actions (e.g.,
assembly, evacuation) in the event of an emergency.
8. A training program should be in place for the instruction and qualification of personnel (i.e.,
primary and alternate) comprising the facility emergency response organization to include initial
training and bi-annual retraining for both onsite and offsite incidents, including transportation
incidents.
9. Retraining should include training on weaknesses detected during drills and exercises, changes
to plans and procedures, and lessons learned from emergencies at other facilities.
10. Offsite emergency response organizations should be offered facility-specific orientation training
and information on hazards and emergency response bi-annually.
Drills and Exercises
A coordinated program of drills and exercises should be an integral part of the emergency
management program as follows:
128
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Drills
Drills should be used to develop and maintain personnel skills, expertise, and response capability.
Drills should be of sufficient scope and frequency to ensure adequate response capability in applicable
areas. Drills should include emergency response activities such as notification, emergency
communication, fire, medical emergencies, hazardous material detection and monitoring,
environmental sampling and analyses, security, personnel, accountability, evacuation, emergency
categorization, decontamination, facility activation, public information, and health physics. There
should be at least one drill per year to train in notification and emergency communications with offsite
authorities.
Exercises
“Table Top” exercises should be conducted annually to test and demonstrate an integrated emergency
response capability.
A full participation exercise should be conducted bi-annually in accordance with established plans and
implementing procedures. A controller and evaluation group should be established for each exercise
to ensure that events occur which address the objectives of the exercise. A critique process should
be conducted for each exercise to provide accomplishments and shortcomings discovered during the
exercise;
Each member of the functional emergency response organization should participate in a “table top”
drill and/or exercise at least annually to demonstrate proficiency in assigned response duties.
TRAINING AND QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENTS
Purpose
The purpose of this section is to establish the staffing, training, qualification, and certification (herein
called training and qualification) requirements for personnel at fusion facilities. It contains
requirements that must be included in training and qualification programs using a graded approach
based upon the hazards of the facility. The requirements are based on governmental and related
industry standards.
Supplemental Guidance
Appendix D provides a listing definitions used in this section of the document. It also provides a
listing of guidance documents that may be useful in developing the site specific training and
qualification programs.
Section 107
Administrative Requirements
General Facility Requirements
The responsibilities and authority of individuals must be specific, and appropriate plans and
procedures must be developed and implemented to assure that the objectives of this program are met.
Each fusion facility should:
129
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
1. Develop and implement a training and qualification program using a graded approach based upon
the hazards of the facility;
2. Prepare, approve and implement a training plan that sets forth the staffing, training, and
qualification requirements.
Training Organization
Each facility should establish an organization that is responsible for the training and qualification of
facility personnel. The duties, responsibilities, qualifications and authority of training organization
personnel should be documented, and managerial responsibilities and authority clearly defined.
Contracted Personnel
Each facility should establish training and qualification criteria for contracted personnel used in facility
organizations:
1. Contracted personnel who act as regular employees in the organization should complete the same
training and qualifications programs required of regular employees, as appropriate to the job.
2. Contracted personnel who perform specialized, temporary or other scope-of-work functions
should be qualified by their contracting company to perform their assigned jobs. The facility
should provide any facility-unique training that may be required.
When contracted personnel used do not meet the training and qualification criteria established, their
work should be overseen by qualified personnel.
Facility Training Plan
The facility training plan is the document that provides the overall description of facility staffing,
training, qualification, and certification programs. This plan should be prepared to address the
following:
1. Initial and continuing training programs, including maintenance of training;
2. Training and qualification programs for personnel who require formal qualification and
certification; and
3. Examination program requirements for qualification and certification.
The facility training plan should be supplemented, as needed, with written procedures that address,
as a minimum: examination and operational evaluation development, approval, security,
administration, and maintenance; administration of medical requirements; and recordkeeping
requirements.
130
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Personnel Selection and Staffing
Personnel Selection
Each facility should establish a process for the selection and assignment of personnel. The personnel
selection process should include an evaluation of their education, experience, previous training, and
existing job skills and capabilities. It is the responsibility of management to assure that personnel
assigned to a specific job function have the requisite background and/or receive sufficient qualification
training for the job.
In those cases where an individual does not meet the literal experience requirements for the position,
consideration should be given to the collective experience of the work unit. Individuals who do not
meet the experience requirements for a position may be assigned to that position provided the
experience of the overall work unit is considered balanced and strong. In such cases, the decision to
assign the individual should be documented and approved by facility management.
Section 108
Entry-level education and experience minimums are provided in Appendix D. In addition, each
facility should describe in a procedure methods for accepting alternatives to the specified education
and experience minimums. Examples of alternatives are provided in Appendix D.
Personnel Staffing
The following categories of facility staff are identified as requiring training, qualification, or
certification in order to perform job functions [see Appendix D for definitions]. If qualification or
certification is identified, it should be documented in writing.
1. Operators and their Supervisors - those who operate primary systems (such as those that produce
the fusion reaction) require certification. Those who operate other systems (such as auxiliary
systems) require qualification.
2. Technicians - training
3. Maintenance Personnel - training
4. Supervisors and Managers - training
5. Operations and Facility Support Functions - those who perform engineering or analytical support
functions require training. Those who perform specialized support functions (such as quality
control, radiation control, or emergency response) require qualification.
Training Requirements
Training Matrices
The program for personnel who require only training is typically detailed in a training matrix prepared
in accordance with a facility procedure. This matrix should include the training requirements as
appropriate to the job function.
131
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Qualification and Certification Procedures
Positions that require formal qualification or certification should be documented in a written
procedure that outlines the qualification or certification requirements.
Management Training
Personnel with management responsibilities should receive training in managerial, communication,
and interpersonal skills that is appropriately tailored to the organization that they supervise. In
disciplines where this training is not included in the manager's university or college curricula (such
as the scientific and engineering disciplines), the plan should require such training as part of the
functional responsibilities of those managers.
Training Exceptions
Initial training programs are developed for personnel with entry-level knowledge and skills. In some
cases, personnel may already possess the requisite knowledge and skills, and may be excepted from
training. The basis for exceptions includes education, prior training, experience, or challenge testing.
Job Incumbency may also be used as a basis for exception for entry-level training and examination
requirements based upon the individual’s incumbency prior to the development of training and
examination requirements and the cognizant manager’s verification of technical competency in the
stated job function.
Personnel who develop or present training programs should receive training credit for their activities
and are excepted from completing this training as “participants.”
As a general rule, exceptions to “hands-on” training or “on the job” may not be granted due to the
unique nature of such training, except for those individuals who develop or present such training.
Exceptions to training (other than by challenge testing or material development/presentation) should
be documented in writing and approved by the facility Training Manager, as recommended by facility
line management. Such documentation should include the name of the individual, the specific training
for which exception is taken, and full and detailed justification for the exception. In no case should
exceptions be granted for required qualification or certification examinations for non-job incumbents.
Section 109
Training Programs
Training programs at fusion facilities should consist of regulatory-driven training (such as OSHA
training) and position-specific training (procedures and methods associated with the job function),
to the extent needed.
Training Required for Facility Access
Each facility should define the minimum training required access (escorted and unescorted). It should
be recognized that completion of access training does not automatically grant access authorization
for the facility. Facility management retains the right to authorize or deny access, in accordance with
approved procedures.
132
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Minimum training required for facility access should include General Employee Training and
Radiation Safety Training.
Initial Training Requirements
The training matrix should include required and recommended entry-level training for the job
function. Each line manager should identify initial training requirements, training priorities, and the
sequence of training for personnel under their supervision who require only training.
The qualification or certification procedure, as applicable, should identify required and recommended
entry-level training for the job function. Such procedures should include both technical (subject
matter) and training evaluators reviews.
Continuing Training Requirements
Continuing training programs should be implemented to maintain and enhance the proficiency of
personnel. A required reading program may also be used, when appropriate, to accomplish
continuing training.
Maintenance of Training
Continuing training includes topics which require renewal. The following is recommended:
1. Two (2) year renewals for General Employee Training and Radiological Health and Safety
programs.
2. “Just in Time” training for facility changes, “Lessons Learned” training and when a governing
document changes, as in the case of procedures.
Unless specified by a regulatory rule, renewal intervals should be determined by each facility based
upon experience with the topic. Personnel should maintain training in those topics required to
support their job function. If an individual does not maintain training, only that part of their job
covered by the lapsed training is impacted.
Qualification Requirements
Qualified Operators and Supervisors
The qualification program for qualified operators and supervisors should be detailed in a procedure
that addresses the following elements of this section. Upon completion of program requirements, the
candidate may be granted qualification.
Education and Experience
Minimum education and experience requirements should be established. Recommended requirements
are detailed in Appendix D.
133
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Specific Training
Specific training requirements should be detailed in a training curriculum developed for the
qualification procedure. The training curriculum should prescribe the minimum training required for
qualification, and should include classroom , practical and on-shift.
Medical Examinations
Medical examination requirements are based upon the physical demands imposed by the job function.
If required, medical examinations are conducted at periodic intervals not to exceed two years.
Medical examination criteria should be detailed in the qualification procedure.
Written Examinations
Written examinations should be required for qualification candidates. However, they are not required
when the training curriculum does not support the need for written examinations, or when the
administration of a written examination does not add value to the overall qualification process.
Section 110
Operational Evaluations
Operational evaluations should be required for qualification candidates.
Maintenance of Proficiency
Initial qualifications should be issued for an effective period not to exceed two (2) years, unless
otherwise suspended or revoked, at which time Requalification is required. If it is determined at any
time that the capabilities of an individual are not in accordance with the qualifications specified for
that job, that individual should be removed from that job. Reinstatement may be made upon
completion of remedial actions, such as retraining and/or reexamination.
Requalification Factors
The qualification procedure should clearly denote which method of Requalification is required for the
specified job function. Requalification should be granted based upon successful completion of
Requalification examinations (written and/or operational evaluation) or continuous satisfactory
performance documented in writing by the cognizant supervisor and approved by the applicable line
manager.
Other Qualified Positions
The qualification program for positions other than operators and supervisors should be detailed in a
procedure that addresses education and experience, medical examination criteria, and training and
examination requirements, as appropriate to the job function. Upon completion of program
requirements, the candidate may be granted qualification. Personnel qualifications other than those
for operators and supervisors may be issued with an indefinite effective period, unless otherwise
suspended or revoked, at which time Requalification is required.
134
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Certification Requirements
Certified Operators and Supervisors
The program leading to certification for operators and supervisors should be governed by a written
procedure, which includes requirements for documented assessment of the person’s qualifications
through examination and operational evaluations. Upon completion of program requirements, the
candidate may be granted certification. The procedure should address the following elements:
Education and Experience
Minimum education and experience requirements should be established. Recommended requirements
are detailed in Appendix D.
Specific Training
Specific training programs should be established to develop or enhance the knowledge, skills, and
ability of certified operators and certified supervisors to perform job assignments. The program
should consist of a combination of classroom and on-the-job training, as it applies to the position and
include training on basic theory and fundamentals, principles of facility operation and operating
characteristics, facility systems, and normal, abnormal, and emergency operating procedures. The
training curriculum should prescribes the minimum training required for certification, and include
classroom, practical and on-shift training.
Medical Examinations
A candidate for certification should received an initial medical examination by a physician and should
be reexamined at least every 2 years to verify health and physical fitness to perform assigned tasks
safely. Medical examination criteria and documentation should be detailed in the certification
procedure.
Written Examinations
Written examinations should be required for certification candidates.
Oral Examinations
Oral examinations should be required for certification candidates if the position requires the ability
to work proficiently under pressure and to make facility-affecting decisions in real-time scenarios.
Oral examinations may be conducted as a one-on-one walkthrough or as a formal oral board.
Section 111
Operational Evaluations
Operational evaluations should be required for certification candidates.
135
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Independent Verification
The qualifications of candidates should be independently verified prior to certification. This
verification should be performed by an individual who was not involved in the training process or who
is not in the candidate’s line organization. The Independent Verification process should be described
in the certification procedure.
Maintenance of Proficiency
Initial certifications are issued for an effective period not to exceed two (2) years, unless otherwise
suspended or revoked, at which time recertification is required. Certified operators and supervisors
should actively participate in certification duties to maintain an active certification status. The
certification procedure should establish requirements and frequency necessary to maintain an active
status. Evidence of this activity must be documented and retained in the individual’s file. If an
individual has not performed within this specified time, the certification should be suspended and
placed on “inactive” status. If it is determined at any time that the capabilities of an individual are not
in accordance with the qualifications specified for that job, that individual should be removed from
that job. Reinstatement may be made upon completion of remedial actions, such as retraining and/or
reexamination.
Recertification and Certification Extension
The certification procedure should denote which method of recertification is required for the specified
job function. Recertification of operators and supervisors is based upon: continuous active status in
the certification; has performed certification duties competently and safely; has a current medical
examination; capable of continuing to assume certification duties competently and safely; current in
the continuing training program; and comprehensive evaluation of performance is documented in
writing and approved by the applicable line manager.
Certifications may be extended for ninety (90) days beyond the effective period of certification with
written approval of the certifying authority. In no case should a certification be extended beyond 180
days.
Other Certified Positions
The certification program for other certified positions should be detailed in a procedure that addresses
education and experience, medical examination criteria, and training and examination requirements,
as appropriate to the job function. Upon completion of program requirements, the candidate may be
granted certification. Other personnel certifications are issued with an effective period specified by
a national consensus code or standard, as appropriate, unless otherwise suspended or revoked, at
which time recertification is required.
Examinations
Procedures for development, approval, security, administration, and maintenance of examinations and
operational evaluations should be established.
136
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Written Examinations
Written examinations should be based upon the topics presented in classroom training portion of the
training curriculum as detailed in the qualification or certification procedure and contain a
representative selection of questions derived from these topics. The qualification or certification
procedure should identify the passing score for written examination. The written examination score
for qualification or certification may be a composite grade of all individual examination scores.
Section 112
Oral Examinations
Oral examinations should be based upon the topics presented in classroom and/or practical training
portion of the training curriculum detailed in the certification procedure. No numerical value is
assigned to oral examinations. The candidate's responses should be evaluated by the examiner as
“satisfactory” or “unsatisfactory” based upon the individual exhibiting a basic knowledge in the
questioned area and the individual is capable of correctly responding to the question. The questions
asked, the candidate's responses to those questions, and the examiner's evaluation should be
documented. The oral examination score for certification should be a composite grade of all
individual oral examinations.
Operational Evaluations
Operational evaluations are based upon the performance items presented in practical training portion
of the training curriculum detailed in the qualification or certification procedure. Operational
evaluations should require the candidate to demonstrate an understanding of, and the ability to
perform the actions necessary to operate the facility safely. Operational evaluations should contain
questions and operational exercises, and may include system and/or component operations. No
numerical value is assigned to operational evaluations. The candidate's demonstrations are evaluated
by the examiner as “satisfactory” or “unsatisfactory.” The job functions demonstrated, the candidate's
performance in these demonstrations, and the examiner's evaluation should be documented. The
operational evaluation score for qualification or certification should be a composite grade of all
individual operational evaluations.
Records
Each qualification and certification procedure should specify the records used to document an
individual’s qualifications, and specify how such documentation is processed for approval. Training
records should be developed, prepared, and maintained in accordance with written procedures. These
procedures should identify the types of records kept and organization responsible for controlling and
retaining training records.
Records of initial qualification, certification and Requalification should be maintained as individual
files. Records should be documented and include the following types of information:
1. Records of education and experience, including resumes;
2. Results of medical examinations (when required);
3. Records of training completed, such as attendance sheets or computer summaries;
137
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
4. Records of training exceptions;
5. Results of examinations, including written examinations and operational evaluations (when
required);
6. Evidence of maintenance of proficiency; and
7. Approvals and effective dates, if applicable.
138
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
APPENDIX A
CONDUCT OF OPERATIONS SUPPLEMENTAL GUIDANCE
DOE-STD-1030-96 Guide to Good Practices for Lockouts and Tagouts
DOE-STD-1031-92 Guide to Good Practices for Communications (includes Change Notice
No. 1, December 1998)
DOE-STD-1032-92 Guide to Good Practices for Operations Organization and Administration
(includes Change Notice No. 1, December 1998)
DOE-STD-1033-92 Guide to Good Practices for Operations and Administration Updates through
Required Reading (includes Change Notice No. 1, December 1998)
DOE-STD-1034-93 Guide to Good Practices for Timely Orders to Operators (includes Change
Notice No. 1, December 1998)
DOE-STD-1035-93 Guide to Good Practices for Logkeeping (includes Change Notice No. 1,
December 1998)
Section 113
DOE-STD-1036-93 Guide to Good Practices for Independent Verification (includes Change
Notice No. 1, December 1998)
DOE-STD-1037-93 Guide to Good Practices for Operations Aspects of Unique Processes
(includes Change Notice No. 1, December 1998)
DOE-STD-1038-93 Guide to Good Practices for Operations Turnover (includes Change Notice
No. 1, December 1998)
DOE-STD-1039-93 Guide to Good Practices for Control of Equipment and System Status
(includes Change Notice No. 1, December 1998)
DOE-STD-1040-93 Guide to Good Practices for Control of On-shift Training (includes Change
Notice No. 1, December 1998)
DOE-STD-1041-93 Guide to Good Practices for Shift Routines and Operating Practices (includes
Change Notice No. 1, December 1998)
DOE-STD-1042-93 Guide to Good Practices for Control Area Activities (includes Change Notice
No. 1, December 1998)
DOE-STD-1043-93 Guide to Good Practices for Operator Aid Postings (includes Change Notice
No. 1, December 1998)
DOE-STD-1044-93 Guide to Good Practices for Equipment and Piping Labeling (includes Change
Notice No. 1, December 1998)
DOE-STD-1045-93 Guide to Good Practices for Notifications and Investigation of Abnormal
Events (includes Change Notice No. 1, December 1998)
DOE-STD-1050-93 Guideline to Good Practices for Planning, Scheduling and Coordination of
Maintenance at DOE Nuclear Facilities
139
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
140
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
APPENDIX B
EMERGENCY PREPAREDNESS SUPPLEMENTAL GUIDANCE
DOE 5500.1A Emergency Management System
DOE 5500.2 Emergency Planning, Preparedness and Response for Operations
DOE 5500.2A Emergency Notification, Reporting and Response Levels
DOE 5500.3A Emergency Planning and Preparedness for Operational Emergencies
DOE 5500.4A Public Affairs Planning Requirements for Emergencies
DOE 5500.8 Emergency Planning and Management
ANS 15.16 Emergency Planning for Research Reactors
NFPA 1561 Standard on Fire Department Incident Management System
141
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
142
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
APPENDIX C
EMERGENCY PREPAREDNESS DEFINITIONS
Affected Persons Individuals who have been exposed or physically injured as a result of an
accident to a degree requiring special attention, e.g., decontamination,
first aid, or medical services.
Assessment Actions Those actions taken prior to, during or after an accident which are
collectively necessary to make decisions to implement specific emergency
measures.
Corrective Actions Those emergency measures taken to ameliorate or terminate an
emergency situation at or near the source of the problem.
Emergency Action Radiological dose rates; specific contamination levels of airborne, water-
Levels borne, or surface-deposited concentrations of radioactivity; or specific
instrument readings that may be used as thresholds for initiating specific
emergency measures.
Facility Equipment, structure, system, process, or activity that fulfills a specific
purpose. Examples include accelerators, storage areas, fusion research
devices, and research laboratories.
Operational Are those radiological and non-radiological accidents and events
Emergencies associated with the serious degradation of safety or security at a DOE
owned or leased Research & Development facility, operation, or activity.
Protective Actions Those emergency measures taken after an uncontrolled release of
radioactive material has occurred for the purpose of preventing or
minimizing radiological exposures to persons that would be likely to
occur if the actions were not taken.
Section 114
Population at Risk Those persons for whom protective actions are or would be taken.
Recovery Actions Those actions taken after the emergency to restore the plant as nearly as
possible to its pre-emergency condition.
143
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
144
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
APPENDIX D
TRAINING AND QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENTS
TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
Certificate of Qualification - document signed by the certifying authority attesting to an individual’s
certification.
Certification - process by which management provides written endorsement of the satisfactory
achievement of qualification of an individual for a specialized operations position based upon its
criticality or safety impact, and generally in response to a DOE Order or national consensus code or
standard.
Certifying Authority - that individual who certifies operators and operator supervisors, in accordance
with a certification procedure.
Maintenance Personnel - persons responsible for performing maintenance and repair of mechanical and
electrical equipment.
Managers - persons whose assigned responsibilities include ensuring that a facility is safely and reliably
operated, and that supporting operating and administrative activities are properly controlled. Each
facility should determine which level personnel and higher are considered Managers.
On-Shift Training - that portion of qualification training where the student receives training within the
job environment and with as much hands-on experience as possible.
Operators - persons responsible for manipulating facility controls, monitoring facility parameters, and
operating facility equipment.
Certified Operators - operators who require certification as determined by facility management.
Qualified Operators - operators who require qualification as determined by facility management.
Qualification - process by which factors, such as education, experience, and any special requirements
(e.g., medical examination) are evaluated in addition to training to assure that an individual can
competently perform a specialized job function to an anticipated level of proficiency.
Qualified - the ability to perform a specific job function based upon completion of a training,
qualification, or certification program developed for the job function. Trained personnel are qualified
to perform their job function based upon completion of training. Qualified and certified personnel are
qualified to perform their job function based upon completion of a specific program. As used in this
document, the term “qualified” personnel has two meanings, based upon context:
Qualified personnel are those personnel who have successfully completed either training, qualification,
or certification requirements appropriate to their job function.
145
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Qualified personnel are those personnel who have successfully completed a formal qualification
program appropriate to their job function.
Statement of Qualification - document signed by an appropriate individual (supervisory or higher)
indicating that an individual is qualified to perform a specialized job function to an anticipated level
of proficiency.
Supervisors - persons who are responsible for the quantity and quality of work, and who direct the
actions of the operators or other personnel.
Certified Supervisors - supervisors who are responsible for the operational activities of certified
operators who require certification as determined by facility management.
Section 115
Qualified Supervisors - supervisors who are responsible for the operational activities of qualified
operators who require qualification as determined by facility management.
Technicians - persons responsible for performing specific maintenance or analytical laboratory work.
Operations and Facility Support Personnel - those individuals who perform technical functions, (such
as engineering evaluations, program reviews, technical problem resolution, or data analyses, within
their area of expertise), or safety, quality assurance, radiation protection, emergency services, and
training functions.
Training Matrix - A listing of the courses and other appropriate requirements to be completed by an
individual in order to satisfy training requirements for a specified job function. Training requirements
and recommendations are matrixed by position.
146
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
GUIDANCE DOCUMENTS
10 CFR 830 Nuclear Safety Management
29 CFR 1910 OSHA Regulations
29 CFR 1926 OSHA Construction Regulations
DOE Order 4330.4A Maintenance Management Program (canceled, replaced by DOE
Order 4330.4B)
DOE Order 5480.20A Personnel Selection, Qualification, and Training Requirements for
DOE Nuclear Facilities
DOE Order 5480.9A Construction Project Safety and Health Management
DOE-HDBK-1001-96 Guide to Good Practices For Training and Qualification of
Instructors
DOE-HDBK-1002-96 Guide to Good Practices for Training and Qualification of
Chemical Operators
DOE-HDBK-1003-96 Guide to Good Practices for Training and Qualification of
Maintenance Personnel
DOE-HDBK-1074-95 Alternative Systematic Approaches to Training
DOE-HDBK-1080-97 Guide to Good Practices For Oral Examinations
DOE-HDBK-1114-98 Guide to Good Practices For Line and Training Manager
Activities
DOE-HDBK-1116-98 Guide to Good Practices for Developing and Conducting Case
Studies
DOE-HDBK-1200-97 Guide to Good Practices For Developing Learning Objectives
DOE-HDBK-1201-97 Guide to Good Practices Evaluation Instrument Examples
DOE-HDBK-1202-97 Guide to Good Practices For Teamwork Training and Diagnostic
Skills Development
DOE-HDBK-1203-97 Guide to Good Practices For Training of Technical Staff and
Managers
DOE-HDBK-1204-97 Guide to Good Practices For the Development of Test Items
DOE-HDBK-1205-97 Guide to Good Practices for the Design, Development, and
Implementation of Examinations
DOE-HDBK-1206-98 Guide to Good Practices For On-the-Job Training
DOE-STD-1029-92 Writer's Guide for Technical Procedures (includes Change Notice
No. 1, December 1998)
DOE-STD-1059-93 Guide to Good Practices for Maintenance Supervisor Selection
and Development
147
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
DOE-STD-1060-93 Guide to Good Practices For Continuing Training
DOE-STD-1061-93 Guide to Good Practices For the Selection, Training , and
Qualification of Shift Supervisors
DOE/EH-0256T Rev 1 DOE Radiological Control Manual
DOE/EH-0353P Occupational Safety and Health Technical Reference Manual
DOE/NE-0102T TAP 2 - Performance-Based Training Manual
DOE/NE-0103T TAP 3 - Training Program Support Manual
SG 830.120 Safety Guide for Quality Assurance
SG 830.310 Guidelines for the Conduct of Operations at DOE Facilities
SG 830.330 Guidelines for the Selection, Training, Qualification and
Certification of Personnel at DOE Nuclear Facilities
TTR89-009 TRADE Document TTR89-009,”Job Task Analysis - Guide to
Good Practices: Volumes I & II”
TTR92-010 TRADE Document TTR92-010, “The Occasional Trainer's
Handbook,” 1992
148
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Section 116
EDUCATION AND EXPERIENCE
Minimums
Position Education Experience
Operators High School 2 Years
Technicians High School 1 Year
Maintenance Personnel High School 1 Year
Supervisors High School 3 Years
Operations and Facility
Support Functions
(Note 1)
Baccalaureate in Engineering or
Related Science
2 Years
Operations and Facility
Support Functions
(Note 2)
High School Work experience as
appropriate to the specific
job-function
Managers Baccalaureate in Engineering or
Related Science
4 Years
Training Manager Baccalaureate with course work
in education and technical
subjects
4 Years
Note 1 Operations and Facility Support personnel who perform engineering or analytical support
functions.
Note 2 Operations and Facility Support personnel who perform specialized support functions (such
as quality control, radiation control, or emergency response).
Alternatives Guidelines
The education and experience guidelines written below may be considered when making an evaluation
of alternatives, recognizing that other factors (such as job incumbency and the ability to competently
perform the assigned job function) and may also be appropriate in lieu of the education and experience
minimums specified.
149
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Education Alternatives
The education requirements identified in this section are high school diploma and baccalaureate
degree. Persons who do not possess the formal educational requirements specified should not be
automatically eliminated where other factors provide sufficient assurance of their abilities to fulfill the
duties of a specific position. These factors should be evaluated on a case-by-case basis, and approved
and documented.
High School Alternatives:
General Educational Development (GED) diploma or completed test.
Certificate of Completion from a post-secondary technical institution.
Completion of technical training provided by the US Armed Forces.
College Alternatives:
Professional engineer license.
Completion of technical portions of a baccalaureate program, with the overall completion of 80
semester credit hours, as determined by a written transcript.
Related experience substituted for education at the rate of six semester credit hours for each year of
experience up to a maximum of 80 credits.
Experience Alternatives
Persons who do not possess the experience requirements specified should not be automatically
eliminated where other factors provide sufficient assurance of their abilities to fulfill the duties of a
specific position. These factors should be evaluated on a case-by-case basis, and approved and
documented in accordance with this procedure.
General:
In those cases where an individual does not meet the literal experience required for a position, and no
other basis for an experience alternative is available, consideration may be given to the collective
experience of the operating organization in lieu of the individual meeting the required experience.
Individuals may be assigned to positions providing the overall operating organization is considered
balanced and strong. In such cases, management approval of this approach (documented in a
memorandum) is required.
Substitution of Course Work and Training:
Where course work is related to job assignments, post-secondary education may be substituted.
Formal education may not be substituted for more than 50% of the experience requirements unless
otherwise specified herein.
150
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
Section 117
Job-related training in the position sought may qualify as equivalent to nuclear experience on a one-to
one basis for up to a maximum of two years.
Completion of technical training provided by the United States Armed Forces.
Training And Qualification Requirements - Basis and Rationale
The Training and Qualification section of the Fusion Safety Standard is based upon the referenced
documents shown in Appendix 1. The program is a compilation of expected requirements
[10CFR830] as well as existing programs in place due to DOE orders. It also includes information
from other standards and documents. If a facility develops a comprehensive program for training and
qualification of its staff using this document on a graded approach, the intent of the requirements and
reference documents will be achieved. The overall effectiveness of such a program can only be
determined by evaluating the effectiveness of the facility during operations.
151
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
152
DOE-HDBK-6004-99
CONCLUDING MATERIAL
Review Activity: Preparing Activity:
DOE
ER
Field Offices
Idaho
DOE-ER-54
Project Number:
SAFT-0059
National Laboratories
Princeton Plasma Physics Laboratory
Savannah River Laboratory
Oak Ridge National Laboratory
Idaho National Engineering and Environmental Laboratory
Untitled
FOREWORD
CONTENTS
ACRONYMS
SECTION I. VACUUM VESSEL
GENERAL SAFETY DESIGN CRITERION
POTENTIAL SYSTEM SAFETY FUNCTIONS
DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS General
General
Structural Design Codes
Hydrogen Detonation
SAFETY-RELATED DESIGN STANDARDS AND CRITERIA.
Structural
Loads
Static Load
Normal Operating Pressure
Normal Operating Thermal Load
Electromagnetic Loads
Interaction Loads
Natural Phenomena Hazard Loads
Loss-of-coolant Loads
Hydrogen Detonation Loads
Site-generated Missile Impact Load
Combined Loads
Cyclic Loading
Vacuum vessel
Piping, Pumps and Valves
Other
Deflection Analysis
Testing
Pressure Test
Computer Code Verification
Materials
Instrumentation and Controls
Vacuum Vessel Penetrations
Ventilation and Exhaust System Criteria
Containment Systems
Inspection
RECOMMENDED DESIGN PRACTICE
Bellows
Ceramic Breaks
SECTION I REFERENCES
Description
Recommended Design Practice
CRYOSTAT
General Recommendations
CONFINEMENT
Ventilation/HVAC
Ventilation systems
Structural Design Codes
General Safety Design Guidance
Potential System Safety Functions
Safety-Class Design Standards and Criteria
Potential Safety Functions
Safety-Related Design Guidance
Structural Design
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS
General Safety Design Guidance
I&C System Analysis and Design
Control System
Safety System
Instrumentation
Potential System Safety Function
Safety Related Design Standards and Criteria
Diversity
Graded Approach to Defense In Depth
Response Time Requirements and Margins
Qualification
Human Factors
Testability and Maintainability
Power
Control Room Design
Safety Actuation
Monitoring
TRITIUM SYSTEMS
Generic System Description
Tritium Storage
Tritium Transfer
Tritium Recovery
Tritium Purification
System Cleaning
Potential System Safety Functions
Design Basis Accidents:
General
Loads
Structural Acceptance Criteria
Deflection Analysis
Testing and Inspection
Computational Methods Validation
Radiation
Thermal
Tritium Embrittlement
Penetrations of Confinement Systems
Primary Confinement Systems
Secondary and Higher Order Confinement Barriers
General
Hydrogen Fires
Hydrogen Detonations
Metal Embrittlement
Recommended Materials
Materials Not Recommended